Spesifikasi Teknik PDF

PROJECT OWNER
PT. SOMA DAYA UTAMA

..................................................
PROJECT TITLE
CONTRUCTION of UNLOADING COAL

JETTY for SOMA KARIMUN COAL FIRED
STEAM POWER PLANT
LOCATION
KARIMUN BESAR ISLAND

MERAL BARAT DISTRIC,KARIMUN
REGENCY, RIAU ISLAND PROVINCE
CONTRACTOR
PT. TRACTUS MULTI SERVICES

.........................................................
DRAWING BY
.........................................................
DATE :
SEGMEN 01
.RAI
R PT
CERTIFIED BY
YO
N VE
SEGMEN 02
CO
A
M AG
D ER
YU
A KA
AG
RM
DE
.........................................................
SEGMEN 03
DATE :
APPROVED BY
.........................................................
DATE :
LEGENDA
DRAWING TITLE
LAYOUT TRESTLE
SCALE 1:100
SHEET NO. DRAWING NO.

E
NV
CO
A
AG
PROJECT OWNER
RM
DE
PT. SOMA DAYA UTAMA
..................................................
PROJECT TITLE

STEAM POWER PLANT
LOCATION

SEGMEN 03 REGENCY, RIAU ISLAND PROVINCE
CONTRACTOR

.........................................................
SEGMEN 02 DRAWING BY
.........................................................
DATE :
CERTIFIED BY
SEGMEN 01 .........................................................
DATE :
APPROVED BY
.........................................................
DATE :
DE
LEGENDA
RM
AG
AK
AY
U
DRAWING TITLE
LAYOUT TRESTLE
SCALE 1:100

PROJECT OWNER
PT. SOMA DAYA UTAMA

..................................................
PROJECT TITLE
90
120
STEAM POWER PLANT
LOCATION

CONTRACTOR
400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400

118 3718

.........................................................
DRAWING BY
.........................................................
DATE :
CERTIFIED BY
.........................................................
DATE :
APPROVED BY
450
700
.........................................................
1160
900
DATE :
450
LEGENDA
460
400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400

118 3718
DRAWING TITLE
PLAN AND CROSS SECTION

OF TRESTLE
SCALE 1:300

PROJECT OWNER
PT. SOMA DAYA UTAMA

..................................................
PROJECT TITLE
90
120
STEAM POWER PLANT
LOCATION

CONTRACTOR
400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400
100 50000

.........................................................
DRAWING BY
.........................................................
DATE :
CERTIFIED BY
.........................................................
DATE :
APPROVED BY
450
700
.........................................................
1125
900
DATE :
450
425
LEGENDA
400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400
100 50000
DRAWING TITLE

OF TRESTLE
SCALE 1:300

PROJECT OWNER
PT. SOMA DAYA UTAMA

..................................................
PROJECT TITLE
90
120
STEAM POWER PLANT
LOCATION

CONTRACTOR
400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400
100 50000

.........................................................
DRAWING BY
.........................................................
DATE :
CERTIFIED BY
.........................................................
DATE :
APPROVED BY
450
700
.........................................................
1125
900
DATE :
450
425
LEGENDA
400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400
100 50000
DRAWING TITLE

OF TRESTLE
SCALE 1:300

PROJECT OWNER
PT. SOMA DAYA UTAMA

..................................................
PROJECT TITLE

STEAM POWER PLANT
LOCATION

CONTRACTOR
100
100

.........................................................
400
400
DRAWING BY
.........................................................
1400
1400
400
400
DATE :
CERTIFIED BY
.........................................................
400
400
DATE :
100
100
APPROVED BY
.........................................................
400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 DATE :
100 3800 100
LEGENDA
DRAWING TITLE

OF PORT
SCALE 1:200

PROJECT OWNER
PT. SOMA DAYA UTAMA

..................................................
PROJECT TITLE

STEAM POWER PLANT
LOCATION

CONTRACTOR

.........................................................
DRAWING BY
.........................................................
DATE :
CERTIFIED BY
.........................................................
DATE :
APPROVED BY
.........................................................
DATE :
LEGENDA
DRAWING TITLE

OF PORT
SCALE 1:150

PROJECT OWNER
PT. SOMA DAYA UTAMA

..................................................
PROJECT TITLE

STEAM POWER PLANT
LOCATION

CONTRACTOR

.........................................................
DRAWING BY
.........................................................
DATE :
CERTIFIED BY
.........................................................
DATE :
APPROVED BY
.........................................................
DATE :
LEGENDA
DRAWING TITLE

OF PORT
SCALE 1:150
PROJECT OWNER
PT. SOMA DAYA UTAMA

..................................................
PROJECT TITLE

STEAM POWER PLANT
LOCATION

CONTRACTOR

.........................................................
DRAWING BY
.........................................................
DATE :
CERTIFIED BY
.........................................................
DATE :
APPROVED BY
.........................................................
DATE :
LEGENDA
DRAWING TITLE

OF PORT
SCALE 1:150

PROJECT OWNER
PT. SOMA DAYA UTAMA

..................................................
PROJECT TITLE

STEAM POWER PLANT
LOCATION

CONTRACTOR

.........................................................
DRAWING BY
.........................................................
DATE :
CERTIFIED BY
.........................................................
DATE :
APPROVED BY
.........................................................
DATE :
LEGENDA
400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400

100 3800 100
DRAWING TITLE

OF PORT
SCALE 1:150

PROJECT OWNER
9404
30 9340 30
1432 1500 1500 1500 1500 1432

PT. SOMA DAYA UTAMA
..................................................
450
PROJECT TITLE
900
STEAM POWER PLANT
400
800
WF.400x200x8x13 LOCATION
610
CONCRETE
POER

GREATING
CONTRACTOR
ANCHOR W1"
PILE

.........................................................
POER
DRAWING BY
.........................................................
DATE :
CERTIFIED BY
.........................................................
DATE :
APPROVED BY
9340 .........................................................
1145 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1145
DATE :
LEGENDA
610
L.50x50x5
DRAWING TITLE
934 934 934 934 CATWALK
934 934 934 934 SCALE
3734 SHEET NO. DRAWING NO.

PROJECT OWNER
30 230 1432
PT. SOMA DAYA UTAMA

..................................................
PROJECT TITLE

STEAM POWER PLANT
LOCATION
GREATING KARIMUN BESAR ISLAND

32
L.50x50x5
360
CONTRACTOR
400
500
80 200 80 MS. PLATE 15mm
800
15
25
610 MS. PLATE 25mm
GROUTING PT. TRACTUS MULTI SERVICES

.........................................................
CONCRETE
DRAWING BY
15 400
500
.........................................................
DATE :
CERTIFIED BY
GREATING .........................................................
L.50x50x5
DATE :
APPROVED BY
L.50x50x5 WF.400x200x8x13
ANCHOR W 1"
.........................................................
DATE :
470 1000
LEGENDA
120 490 120

810
200
120
130
80
900
80
130
810
610
DRAWING TITLE
200
120
100 200 100 CATWALK

400
SCALE

PROJECT OWNER
1600
4 D22
950
30 D16 STEK KEPALA TIANG PT. SOMA DAYA UTAMA
..................................................
400 520 650
11 D16
80 EL. +4.000
30 80 PROJECT TITLE
4 D 22 400
STEK
8 D16
320
KEPALA TIANG
4 D22
80
8 D22 JETTY for SOMA KARIMUN COAL FIRED
700
STEK TIANG PANCANG
STEAM POWER PLANT
380
9 D16 17 D19
9 D16 LOCATION
9 D19
1
11 D16
1200
400
HWS +2.850 REGENCY, RIAU ISLAND PROVINCE
900
1000
4 D22
200
8 D 22
CONTRACTOR
STEK TIANG
80
16 D19
4 D22
100
9 D16 9 D19
MSL +1.425 80
16 D16 30 7 D19
PT. PRIMA PILAR PERKASA
.........................................................
PENGGANTUNG
RENCANA KEPALA TIANG TYPE 1 6 D16
SKALA 1 : 40
( RANGKA SPIRAL ) DRAWING BY
1000
BETON PRECAST
.........................................................
MSL 0.000 KAWAT SPIRAL DATE :

30 D16 Ø10-100
300 150
STIRRUP
CERTIFIED BY
450
320
D13-150
.........................................................
2
700
DATE :
380
18 D16
9 D19 APPROVED BY
STIRRUP D13-150
4
PROTEKSI THD KOROSI
( min. 300 )
VARIASI
SELIMUT TIANG
D13 HDPE .........................................................
TIANG PANCANG DATE :

18 D16 Ø508 t=12mm
1200
LEGENDA
1000
2500
16 D16
POTONGAN 3-3
SKALA 1 : 25
PENGGANTUNG 6 D 16
RANGKA SPIRAL
TIANG PANCANG BAJA

Ø 508 T=12MM
800
3 Ø508
DRAWING TITLE
1000 600
SPIRAL Ø10-100 1600

PILE HEAD TYPE 1
POTONGAN 1-1
1200
SKALA 1 : 25
Ø 508
8 D 22 SCALE 1:25
STEK TIANG PANCANG
POTONGAN 4 - 4
POTONGAN 2 -2 SKALA 1 : 25
SKALA 1 : 40
PROJECT OWNER
400
4D22
PT. SOMA DAYA UTAMA
..................................................
80
4 D22
STEK KEPALA TIANG PROJECT TITLE
80
80
11D19
400
ATAS
8 D22 JETTY for SOMA KARIMUN COAL FIRED
320
STEK TIANG PANCANG
STEAM POWER PLANT
1 1
700
1200
400
400
LOCATION
380
8D19
BAWAH
4D22 4D22
400
4D16
5D16
80
80
4D16
80 80
800
4D16
8D19
CONTRACTOR
min. = 300
4D22
200
100
400 400 400 5D16 80 80
1200
6D19
5D16
2D19
2D19
.........................................................
RENCANA KEPALA TIANG TYPE 2
SKALA 1 : 25 DRAWING BY
.........................................................
PENGGANTUNG
t=12 4D16 DATE :
1800
BETON ISIAN TIANG CERTIFIED BY
MIN. S/D MUKA AIR
kawat SPIRAL
.........................................................
D10-100
DATE :
30
APPROVED BY
0~2.4
50°
.........................................................
65
DATE :
2
LEGENDA
500
DUA SISI DI LAS
35
-0.50 LWS
508
PLAT BAJA
MIN. TEBAL = 4 mm
PROTEKSI THD KOROSI

SELIMUT TIANG
HDPE
2.3
3.2 TIANG PANCANG BAJA
DRAWING TITLE
Ø 508 mm T=12 mm
DETAIL PENGHUBUNG TIANG

TIDAK SKALA
Ø 508
PILE HEAD TYPE 2
600 600
SCALE 1:25
1200
POTONGAN 1-1
SKALA 1 : 25
PROJECT OWNER
E:\gren\cccccc\f28553d6-b755-4056-8e63-36cb1c018e9e.jpg
PT. SOMA DAYA UTAMA

..................................................
PROJECT TITLE

STEAM POWER PLANT
LOCATION

CONTRACTOR

.........................................................
DRAWING BY
.........................................................
DATE :
CERTIFIED BY
.........................................................
DATE :
APPROVED BY
.........................................................
DATE :
LEGENDA
DRAWING TITLE
DETAIL BOLLARD
SCALE 1:20
PROJECT OWNER
PT. SOMA DAYA UTAMA

..................................................
PROJECT TITLE

STEAM POWER PLANT
LOCATION

CONTRACTOR

.........................................................
DRAWING BY
.........................................................
DATE :
CERTIFIED BY
.........................................................
DATE :
APPROVED BY
.........................................................
DATE :
LEGENDA
DRAWING TITLE
DETAIL BITT
SCALE 1:20
PROJECT OWNER
0.100
PT. SOMA DAYA UTAMA

..................................................
PROJECT TITLE
10000
STEAM POWER PLANT
LOCATION

CONTRACTOR
t=12

.........................................................
DRAWING BY
10000
30000
.........................................................
30
0~2.4 DATE :
50°
CERTIFIED BY
65
2
.........................................................
DATE :
35
APPROVED BY
Ø 508
.........................................................
DATE :
LEGENDA
2.3
3.2
10000
DRAWING TITLE
PILE DETAIL
SCALE
Ø508
PROJECT OWNER
PT. SOMA DAYA UTAMA

..................................................
PROJECT TITLE

STEAM POWER PLANT
LOCATION

CONTRACTOR

.........................................................
DRAWING BY
.........................................................
DATE :
CERTIFIED BY
.........................................................
DATE :
APPROVED BY
.........................................................
DATE :
LEGENDA
DRAWING TITLE
DETAIL FENDER KANSTEIN
SCALE

SECTION 1A
GENERAL
1. GENERAL
a. Work under this Contract shall be subject to VOLUME I which precedes these Technical
Specifications.
b. The provisions and requirements of this Division 1 shall apply to all Sections in Volume II
whether or not specifically referenced therein.
c. This Section sets forth supplementary and additional general requirements for this Contract.
d. All works specified in the Contract shall be subject in every respect to the approval of the
Engineer.
e. The Contractor shall perform all work required in these Specifications. Failure to specify
certain work items does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to provide a workable
installation.
f. In the event of ambiguity between the Drawings and the Specifications, it shall be settled as
specified in VOLUME I, Division 3: Condition of Contract.
g. Engineer’s Duties and Authorities shall be subject to the Employer’s approval decisions. The
Engineer shall carry out such duties in issuing certificates and orders as specified in the
Contract. (Clause 2.1, 2.2, 2.3 Engineer’s Duties & Authority – Condition of Contract)
h. Supervisor will be assigned to assist the Engineer's Representative for the supervision of the
work at the site. The Supervisor will have the responsibilities for checking of quality and
quantity of the work at the site, issuance of technical instructions to the Contractor, if needed,
checking of progress of the work, checking of measurement of the works performed and
checking of Interim Payment Certificates to the Contractor.
The Contractor shall submits letters and notifications related these matters to the Engineer,
other than the matters mentioned above, to the Engineer's Representative Office in Jakarta and
a copy of these documents shall be submitted to the Supervisor at site.
2. NOTIFICATION REQUIRED FROM CONTRACTOR
a. Test and Inspection
When, during the execution of this Contract, and as required by these Specifications, various
tests and inspections are required, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in advance of such
tests and inspections to allow the Engineer to make preparations. Minimum advance notice
shall be as follows.
1] When required at or near the site : Notify the Engineer not less than 7 working days in
advance.
2] When remote from the site : Notify the Engineer not less than 10 working days in
advance.
1A Sheet 1 of 5
b. Notice of Construction Delays
1] Delays in work which may become the subject or basis of claims for time extensions or
changes in Contract Price shall be immediately reported to the Engineer as soon as such
conditions be come apparent.
2] The Contractor shall set forth and outline circumstances in written form and report the
Engineer within 5 working days of its discovery.
c. Notice of Accidents and Fires
The Engineer shall be immediately informed of any accident, fire or other emergencies which
arise on the site, at temporary work yard or at adjacent areas which may affect the works of
this Contract.
3. PERFORMANCE REQUIRED BEFORE STARTING WORK
The Contractor shall perform the followings prior to starting particular type or kind of work.
a. Examine relevant information, all Contract Documents and subsequent data issued to him.
b. Carry out, survey and sounding observations as required by the Contract Documents.
c. Submit detailed shop drawings of the various works for the permanent works as well as the
temporary works.
d. Check approved submittals and verify dimensions at the job site.
e. Submit manufacturer's instructions applicable to conditions under which work is to be done.
f. Inspect areas, surfaces of site or structures to receive the work.
4. DAMAGES AND RESTORATION
a. Damage to existing or newly placed facilities caused by movement of contractor's equipment

or other operations, whether accidentally or made necessary by reason or the requirements of
the Contract, shall be restored or replaced as specified or as directed by the Engineer at the
expense of the Contractor.
b. Restoration shall be equal to structural qualities or performance capacities of original work,

and finishes shall match, as nearly as possible, existing adjacent work. Restorations shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineer.
c. Work not properly restored or not meet the requirements of these Specifications shall be
removed and replaced as directed by the Engineer at no additional expense to the Employer.
1A Sheet 2 of 5
5. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
a. The Contractor shall immediately refer to the Engineer any requirement shown or specified
which the Contractor finds or believes that :
1] Not equal to industrial standards to achieve the first-class quality construction as

intended,
2] Excessive in cost or effort not to effect in the intended results,
3] Below standards for proper enforcement of guarantees required, or
4] At variance with governing laws, regulations, codes or standards.
b. Work operations relating to any matter referred to the Engineer for consideration shall not be
proceed until receipt of instructions from the Engineer.
c. Inspection of Works and Materials
The Contractor shall immediately make a detailed and thorough inspection of all materials as
delivered and all work in progress and shall promptly reject and return all defective materials
and re-do any substandard work without waiting for their rejection by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall check and verify adequate performance or satisfactory results of all tests and
inspections before allowing subsequent work to proceed.
6. STANDARDS AND ABBREVIATIONS
a. The following standards will be applied for the work to the extent applicable, unless
otherwise specified in each Section of the Specifications and referred to by he abbreviations
shown below.
Organization Abbreviation
1] Standard Nasional Indonesia SNI

2] SKK 400
3] British Standard BS
4] American Concrete Institute ACI
5] American Institute of Steel Construction AISC
6] American National Standards Institute ANSI
7] American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM
8] American Welding Society AWS
9] Standard Industri Indonesia SII
10] Standard Konstruksi Bangunan Indonesia SKBI
11] American Association of State Highway AASHTO
Transportation Official
12] Japan Electrical Manufacturer Association JEM
13] National Electrical Code NEC
14] Verband Deutscher Electrotechniker VDE
15] American Welding Society AWS
16] National Fire Protection Association NFPA
17] Peraturan Beton Indonesia PBI
18] Peraturan Umum Bangunan Indonesia PUBI
19] Peraturan Perencanaan Bangunan Baja Indonesia PPBBI
1A Sheet 3 of 5
20] German Industrial Standard DIN
21] Millimeter (s) mm
22] Centimeter (s) cm
23] Meter (s) m
24] Km (s) Km
25] Square centimenter (s) Sq.cm. or cm2
26] Cubic meter (s) cu.m or m3
27] Linear meter (s) LM
28] Drawing Dwg
29] Volt V
30] Watt W
31] Kilo Watt KW
32] Kilo Volt Ampere KVA
33] Milli Ampere mA
34] Ampere A
35] Hertz Hz
36] Decibel dB
37] Litre l
38] Kilo litre Kl
39] Horsepower (s) HP
40] Each Ea
41] Lump Sum L.S
42] Maximum Max.
43] Minimum Min.
44] Number No.
45] Reinforced Concrete R.C.
46] Japanese Yen Currency Yen
47] Rupiah Currency of the Republic Indonesia Rp.
48] Sheet Sht.
49] Kilogram Kg
50] Metric ton T or ton
Matters not specified in these specifications shall be in accordance with the following codes.
1] Dewan Teknik Pembangunan Indonesia DTPI

2] Peraturan Umum untuk Bahan PUBB
Bangunan Indonesia
3] Peraturan Cat Indonesia PCI
4] Department related to construction in Indonesia
5] Other regulations relating to construction in Indonesia
Unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer, application of these codes and standards
shall be made according to their latest editions.
b. Where one of the above standards is referred to, the corresponding other standards listed
above shall be considered to be equally applicable provided that performance and functions of
materials, workmanship or methods of tests, etc., are equal to or better than those
specifications in the referred standard, and provided also that the quantity of the works will
not be increased on account of complying with the new standards.
1A Sheet 4 of 5
c. The Contractor shall submit proof that, when a standard other than that of specification is
proposed, it is in fact that equal to or better than the standard. Such reference shall in every
case be considered to be applied the latest edition as of the date of Invitations to Tender,
unless otherwise specifically noted herein.
d. Abbreviations
In the Contract Documents and Drawings, the following abbreviations are used.
mm : millimeter
cm : centimeter
m : meter
sq.m : square meter
cu.m : cubic meter
g : gram
kg : kilogram
t : ton [1 ton = 1,000 kg]
max : maximum
min : minimum
DWG : drawing
EL. : elevation
dia. : diameter
t-m : ton-meter
Rp. : Rupiah [Indonesian currency]
ft : feet [1 ft = 0.3048 m]
DWT : dead weight tonnage
approx. : approximate[ly]
q'ty : quantity
LWS : Low Water Spring
HWL : High Water Level
LMD : Lamda
LWL : Low Water Level
BM : Bench Mark
1A Sheet 5 of 5
SECTION 1B
SCOPE OF WORK
1. GENERAL
a. This Section generally defines the works as a whole, and the works required under this
Contract.
b. The Contractor shall bear in mind that the descriptions of scope of the work herein are only
for main items of works within the whole works required under the Contract, and failure to
describe herein shall not relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to complete the works
required under the Contract.
2. SCOPE OF THE WORKS
Scope of works for the port facilities are as follows:

 Construction of wharf extension (75 x 15 m2) which consist of reinforced concrete
upper structure and supported by steel pile foundation, including all accessories
 Construction of breadth extension of existing wharf (3 bloks @ 25 x 5 m2), which
consist of reinforced concrete upper structure and supported by steel pile
foundation, including all accessories
 Construction of trestle which consist of reinforced concrete upper structure and
supported by steel pile foundation including all accessories
 Construction of Breasting Dolphins, Mooring Dolphins, Catwalk Supports,
Catwalk, including all accessories for Tanker Berthing Facility
 Construction of Road, Parking Area, and Drainage
 Construction of Port Fence and Gate
 Construction of Buildings (Office, Warehouse, etc)
 Construction of Open Storage
 Mechanical and Electrical Works
 Harbor Lamp and Navigation Aids
1B Sheet 1 of 1
SECTION 1C
TEMPORARY WORKS
1. GENERAL
a. This Section sets forth supplementary and additional provisions relating to temporary works,
facilities and safeguards required for execution of the works under the Contract.
b. Temporary works, facilities and safeguards specified or required, including coordination in

change of services and like activities, shall be provided for proper performance of the work,
necessary to comply with all statutory regulations, and as necessary to expedite and properly
execute the works.
c. Temporary construction shall be adequate for intended uses and for all loads imposed without
excessive settlement, deflection or deformation. All parts and members shall be properly
supported, wedged, braced, and secured to prevent displacement of failure.
d. Temporary utilities and permanent utilities used for construction shall be adequate for
intended uses and shall not be overloaded, used or arranged in any manner endangering
persons, premises or work. Connections shall be properly made with lines and wiring securely
anchored in place and protected against accidents.
2. SITE CLEARANCE
a. The Contractor shall carry out the site clearance in the whole site area before commencement
of the subsequent works under the Contract. Debris, tree roots, used wire ropes and all the
unsuitable materials for the reclamation, piling work and whatsoever shall be removed from
the site and disposed at the disposal area designated by the Engineer in a manner satisfactory
to the Engineer.
b. The existing trees in the site which can be an obstruction to the work or will no more be
necessary, shall be removed by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer, unless otherwise
directed by the Engineer for utilization as a part of the landscaping.
c. Any sand and soils in the site shall not be used or taken out of the site without prior
permission of the Engineer.
d. Completion
1] Upon or before completion of the work, if so required or directed, temporary structures,

installations and utility services shall be disconnected and removed from the premises.
2] Exterior areas used for temporary installations or work shall be returned to their original
condition as much as possible or otherwise completed as required at such areas.
1C Sheet 1 of 6
3. TEMPORARY WORK YARD, UTILITIES AND SERVICES
a. Temporary Work Yard
1] A temporary work yard will be provided to the Contractor near the each construction site.
The area will be provided free of charge in the existing condition. The Contractor shall
reclaim, excavate and grade at his own cost, if necessary.
2] If it is necessary for the Contractor to use area other than provided by the Employer, the
Contractor shall arrange it by himself at his own expense and responsibility.
b. Water
The Contractor shall provide adequate capacity of water for construction purposes and living
necessities as listed below at his own expense.
1] Drinking Water
The drinking water shall be supplied by the Contractor at his own expense and
responsibility. The Contractor shall provide and maintain canister coolers or connected
drinking foundations of sufficient number to reasonably serve the works.
2] Construction Water
The Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary water service and distribution of
adequate capacity for construction purposes, including portable units reservoir, etc., as
necessary at his own cost.
c. Power and Lighting
1] The Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary electric generators and distribution
of adequate capacity for power, lighting and other construction needs including wiring,
transformers, safety devices, connections, etc., as necessary at his own cost.
2] The Contractor shall provide temporary lighting as necessary to properly and safely
perform the work at enclosed spaces or hazardous conditions. Likewise, night
illumination shall be provided for as necessary.
3] Temporary electrical system shall comply with the local codes and regulations.
d. Sanitary
1] The Contractor shall provide temporary toilet facilities of the type approved by the
Engineer in sufficient quantity to adequately serve the temporary work yard and the site.
2] These facilities shall be maintained daily with cleaning and supplies.
e. Waste and Rubbish
1] The Contractor shall provide regular daily clean up to removal of trash, waste,
construction debris, etc., from the site and the temporary work yard.
1C Sheet 2 of 6
2] Transportation to disposal areas shall be arranged and disposal of waste and rubbish shall
be conducted by the Contractor.
4. FIRST-AID AND FIRE PROTECTION
a. Emergency Calls
The list of locations of the nearest available police, hospital or medical services shall be
maintained at the Contractor's site office for emergency communication.
b. Fire Protection
1] The Contractor shall establish appropriate emergency routes and procedures and submit
such plans to the Engineer.
2] Fire extinguishers, connected hoses and other facilities necessary for reasonable fire
extinguishing action shall be maintained at the site and the temporary work yard.
c. Minor Injuries
The Contractor shall provide and maintain at the site office a reasonable amount of bandages
and sterilized materials for first-aid treatment of minor injuries.
5. CONSTRUCTION SAFEGUARD
a. Trenches intersecting thorough a road shall be provided with bridges or other crossing
suitable for safely carrying the type of traffic involved, as necessary.
b. Open shafts, openings in floors, ramps, platform and other such conditions shall be protected
by or sturdy barricades or railings.
c. Scaffolding, ladders, ramps, hoists and other facilities shall be provided, maintained and
operated as necessary.
d. Storage and maintenance shop area shall be provided, arranged and maintained at designated
or approved locations as necessary to properly store, handle and fabricate the various
materials and equipment required.
e. Only persons experienced in handling boats shall be allowed to operate boats of any type. The
maximum number of persons that each boat can safely carry shall be plainly marked thereon,
so that it is readily visible. Each craft shall be provided with life vest for the maximum
number of persons that can safely be carried.
f. All men at work over water where there is a possibility of drawing shall wear life vests. In
addition, all barges, boats and power-propelled boats shall be equipped with one or more
readily available ring life preservers with at least 18 meters of line attached.
1C Sheet 3 of 6
6. INTERRUPTION OF WORKS DUE TO SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
a. Refer to clause 40 of Condition of Contract.
b. When, in the opinion of the Engineer, any operation, works or working conditions are such as
to present a danger to persons and/or property, such work shall be immediately interrupted
and the Engineer's action shall, by no means, be interpreted as relieving the Contractor of any
of his responsibilities in the execution of his work, nor shall any compensation by extension
of time be made to the Contractor on account of any interruption of work due to
implementation of safety measures.
7. FACILITIES FOR PROJECT MANAGER
7.1 The contractor shall provide housing for Project Manager.
7.2 The contractor shall provide vehicle for Project Manager for Jetty of PT. Soma Daya Utama
8. MISCELLANEOUS
a. The Contractor shall provide adequate means of communication between the working boats,
job site and Contractor's office.
b. The Contractor shall provide and maintain an adequate SSB communication equipment for
use by himself and the Engineer at the contractor's cost. SSB shall be of coastal Radio Station
class IV, with capacity = 100 watt, minimum 3 channel. After completion of the work, the
equipment shall be handed over to the Employer without any additional cost to the Employer.
c. Temporary enclosure shall be built using suitable materials to surround the site and also other
places where the Engineer designates. Entrances of the enclosure shall also be provided by the
Contractor where the Engineer designates.
d. If the Engineer judges necessary, the Contractor shall provide suitable protection for the
construction objects, adjacent buildings, land, road, etc., to protect them from damage.
e. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide by himself temporary facilities with
sufficient strength, capacity and safety for the construction of all works or unloading of
constructional plant and materials required under the Contract.
9. TOPOGRAPHIC/HYDROGRAPHIC SURVEY
a. General
1] The Contractor shall carry out the surveys as a part of the preparatory works required
under the Contract.
2] a. All surveys shall be carried out in reference to the Bench Marks or monuments. And
chart datum shall be observed by the Contractor and checked with existing datum.
b. Locations of the Bench Mark [ minimum 2 (two) ] and key points should be refered to
geographical coordinate and measured by GPS.
c. The accuracy of the GPS should be approved by the Engineer before the Contractor
start the survey work.
1C Sheet 4 of 6
3] All surveys shall be carried out by licensed and well experienced surveyors. The
Contractor shall submit in advance true copies of licenses and qualifications of the
surveyors to be engaged for the work shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
4] The Contractor shall submit prior to commencing the survey, the work program
describing his general work arrangement, the positioning system, survey equipment to be
employed and time schedule of the work to the Engineer for approval.
b. Topographic Survey
1] The Contractor shall carry out the topographic survey of the project area including
relevant access road by means of traversing, and leveling, covering all area as necessary.
2] All stations shall be established by closed traversing with an error of closure of less than
1/3,000 and return or closed leveling within an accuracy of 20 mm in 1 (one) kilometer.
3] The survey shall be carried out in the presence of the Engineer or designated person by
the Engineer in 5.00 m intervals grid established at commencement of the work.
4] Field notes, calculation sheets and other documents shall be prepared in English language
and submitted by the Contractor in a manner approved by the Engineer for his inspection
thereof.
c. Hydrographic
1] The Contractor shall carry out a sounding survey and tide observation in the project area.
2] The sounding shall be carried out by an echo sounder of approved manufacturer capable
of sounding the depth within an accuracy of 10 cm. The recording paper shall be of dry
type. The tidal observation shall be carried out continuously during the sounding period,
or every 30 minutes.
3] The sounding shall be made by the Contractor under the supervision of the Engineer on
the water area as necessary.
This should be conducted prior to the commencement of the construction work unless
otherwise directed by the Engineer. The sounding shall, as far as possible, be performed
in calm weather.
4] Recorded data shall be corrected by the fraction index of underwater acoustic velocity. In
order to obtain the value of adjustment, bar check shall be performed before and after
sounding of one day.
5] After survey, the Contractor shall immediately prepare sounding maps on approved
plastic sheets in 1/1,000 scales. The maps shall have contour lines of 2.50 m vertical
intervals.
6] A tidal observation shall be done for 15 days. The reading of tidal record shall be at an
interval of 1 hour or less. Base on 15 days tide observation data, the Contractor should
calculate the tidal factors and estimate HWS, MSL and LWS.
7] Field notes and other documents shall be prepared and submitted as specified clause b. 4]
above.
1C Sheet 5 of 6
10. APPLICATION FOR CONSTRUCTION
The Contractor shall be responsible for application for construction of the respective works
required under the Contract to the related governing authorities. Such application may be
necessary for, but not limited to and without any responsibility against the Employer and the
Engineer, electrical work to the Indonesian Electricity Authority (PLN), SSB communication
work to authorities concerned (Port authority may assist the Contractor to get the frequency to be
used), water supply work, building works, etc. in accordance with the laws and regulations of the
Republic of Indonesia. The lump sum price entered by the Contractor in this item of the Bill of
Quantities shall be deemed to include and cover all cost and expense for such application, unless
otherwise specified in the items.
1C Sheet 6 of 6
SECTION 1D
PROGRAM OF WORK
1. GENERAL
a. This Section sets forth supplementary and additional provisions relating to time schedules and
construction programmers required under this Contract.
b. References
Condition of Contract, Clause 14
SECTION 1H, SUBMITTALS
2. PROGRAM OF WORK
a. Within 30 calendar days after the date of the Notice to Proceed the Work, the Contractor shall
submit a detailed construction program and material procurement and labor employment
schedules for the works to the Engineer for checking and approval.
1] The construction program shall show the general planned progress of the entire works
commencing with the site installation and ending with the site clearance after completion
of the works and shall include dates of starting and ending of the various stages of the
works and also contain dates of issuing purchase orders, manufacture, shipping arrival
and installation of the permanently installed facilities.
2] Material procurement and labor employment schedule shall show the delivery dates of the
required construction materials and number of laborers for the work in accordance with
the general planned progress of the entire works.
b. The preliminary construction schedule which the Contractor has already submitted in outline
with his Tender is subject to further adjustment, but is binding insofar as the important and
key dates.
c. The total construction schedule is to be adjusted from time to time according to the actual
progress of the works subject to the condition that the date of completion of the respective
works will remain unchanged, unless extension of time for completion is approved in
accordance with the Contract.
d. Clause 14 of the Conditions of Contract sets forth the specific type of program required for
the time schedules of the works.
e. The Contractor should express that they have incorporate the Quality Assurance System in
their program of work.
f. Contractor should conduct Environmental Management Monitoring during construction

phase, based on following consideration :
a) Type of Monitored Impact
1D Sheet 1 of 4
The type of the impact that monitored during construction phase is the impact of water
quality deterioration of :
Name of Port Impact of
Jetty of PT. Soma Daya Utama Surrounding Water Area
b) Objectives of the Monitoring
The objectives of the monitoring the impact of river water quality deterioration is to
observe the success level of the environmental management that have been done so far.
c) Monitoring Location
Monitored location will be :
Name of Port Monitoring Location
Jetty of PT. Soma Surrounding Water Area Jetty of PT. Soma Daya Utama
Daya Utama
d) Monitoring Parameters
The river water quality parameters that monitored during construction phase is turbidity,
biological oxygen demand (BOD), chemical oxygen demand (COD), acidity level (pH),
total dissolved solids (TDS), total suspended solids (TSS).
e) Monitoring Method and Equipment
Materials
The chemical materials used to obtain the river water sample are :
 Thick H2SO4
 HNO3 thick solvent
 Aquades for washing
Equipment
Equipment used in executing the monitoring are :

1. Plastic sample bottles or polyethylene and glasses with 500 ml minimal capacity to
keep water sample collections
2. 0.02 ml Drops Pipes
3. Light and dark BOD bottles with 300 ml capacity for each sample taking point.
4. Petri disc
5. Ice box and ice
6. Waterproof spidol markers
7. Plastic bucket with 10 liter of capacity and plastic water scoop
8. Measurement glass with 1 liter capacity
9. Adhesive tapes and tissue papers
10. Monitoring report forms
11. pH meter or Ph paper
12. Thermometer
13. Glass bottles with 0.75 liter of capacity, ropes and bottle sealer.
1D Sheet 2 of 4
Water Sample Taking
1. Prepare the material and equipment, bring them to the monitoring location.
2. Take the water sample bottle and put the related label that include type of sample
water, sample taking location code, date and time of execution and preservatives used
for the process.
3. Take 5 liter of water from point of monitoring and put it in the bucket using water
scoop or glass bottle.
4. Measure the pH of the sample water and write it down in the monitoring form.
5. Take the measurement of the water temperature and write it down in the monitoring
form
6. Pour the sample water in to the bottle up to its neck.
7. Treat the sample bottle as mentioned in Table 6.1
8. Close the bottle lid and seal it with adhesive tape
9. Keep the collections of sample water bottles in the ice box filled with ice and send it to
the laboratory for other analysis.
Table 1D.1
Starting Treatment on Water Sample
Bottle Type Treatment Analysis
I G Put thick H2SO4 till pH of 2 COD, phenol, ammoniac

achieved
II P/G No preservatives Turbidity, TSS, pH, oil
III G (BOD bottle) Closely covered with black BOD measuring
plastic
Note : P plastic bottle, glass bottle
f) Analysis Method
Right after the water sample be given the necessary treatment and preservatives, it is then
to be analyzed in regard to its parameters set in advance. The water sample analysis
method is in accordance with the Minister of KLII Decree nr. 02/1988. However, should
there be other better equipment exist, it may also be used. Water sample analysis method
is presented in Table 6.2.
Table 1D.2
Water Sample Analysis Method
Nr. Parameter U/Meas Analysis Description
1 pH - Ph meter or litmus In site

2 BOD5 Mg/I Incubated in 20° of temp Laboratory
for 5 days measured the
DO5
3 COD Mg/I Tetrameter with K2Cr2O7 Laboratory
indicators
º
4 Temperature C Expansion In site
5 TSS Mg/I Gravimetric measurement Laboratory
6 Turbidity NTU Nephelo photo metric Laboratory
1D Sheet 3 of 4
g) Standard Measurement
Standard measurement utilized in monitoring the river water quality is Environment

Standard Quality in accordance with Minister KLII Decree nr. 02/1988. This standard
measurement is presented in Table 6.3.
Table 1D.3
River Water Quality Standard Measurement
Nr. Parameter U/Meas Standard Quality Description
1 pH - 5-9 In site
2 BOD5 Mg/I 40 Laboratory
3 COD Mg/I 80 Laboratory

º
4 Temperatur C Normal In site
5 TSS Mg/I 1,000 Laboratory
6 Turbidity NTU 40 Laboratory
h) Monitoring Time
River water quality monitoring done once in six months in line with the running season in
Indonesia at a given time.
i) Monitoring Institution
The monitoring executor is the contractor of the Jetty of PT. Soma Daya Utama
construction
3. Water Biotic Monitoring
No monitoring done for the impact of water biotic disturbance since the impact dimension is
relatively small. If it is monitored there will be no significant changes found.
4. Air Quality Monitoring
No monitoring done for the impact to the air quality since the impact dimension is relatively
small. If it is monitored there will be no significant changes found.
1D Sheet 4 of 4
SECTION 1E
DRAWINGS
1. GENERAL
a. This Section sets forth supplementary and additional provisions relating to drawings.
b. Reference
2. TENDER DRAWINGS
Drawings for the Tender and Contract of the Project [Contract Drawings] are provided as VOLUME
IV, DRAWINGS of which number and title are listed in attached Table 1 F - LB, 1 F - MR and 1 F -
MN.
3. SHOP DRAWINGS
a. The shop drawings shall mean and include all kinds of shops, assembly, installation and other
working drawings inclusive of detailed calculations, specifications, data, catalogues and other
information accompanying the shop drawings.
b. The Contractor shall, if required under the respective sections or where necessary for the proper
execution of the works, prepare and submit for the Engineer's approval fully detailed shop
drawings in accordance with the time schedule specified or, if not fixed therein, well in advance
of the commencement of the pertinent works.
c. The shop drawings shall accurately show kinds and quantities of materials, methods of assembly,
workmanship and other information required for fabrication, erection and installation. The
relationship with adjoining works shall also be properly shown.
d. All shop drawings shall be prepared to the A-1 sizes [594 x 841 mm] unless otherwise permitted
by the Engineer.
1] The drawings inclusive of any printed materials, illustrations, etc., shall be identified by
works, titles and numbers and bound in sets.
2] No drawings will be checked by the Engineer unless they bear a stamp and signature
indicating that the Contractor has checked them and that they have been carefully prepared by
competent persons familiar with the works.
1E Sheet 1 of 2
e. The Engineer will approve or return with comments the submitted shop drawings according to the
said schedule or, if not fixed therein, basically according to procedure for approval specified in
SECTION 1H, SUBMITTALS.
f. If any of the shop drawings is rejected or returned with comments for corrections, the Contractor
shall submit corrected drawings as directed by the Engineer and shall obtain, in all cases, the
Engineer's approval before proceeding with the works. No claim for delay caused by the rejection
of drawings will be accepted if such rejection is due to non-compliance with the works shown
therein or of the Contractor's responsibilities under the Contract requirements or the procedures
specified herein.
g. The submission of the drawings, in either the original submission or resubmission with
corrections, shall constitute the evidence that the Contractor has checked all descriptions
thereupon, has accepted them and is willing to carry out the works as shown in a workmanlike
manner and in accordance with the best standard practice.
h. The Engineer's approval of the shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor from any of his
responsibilities and duties required under the Contract.
4. AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
a. The Contractor shall prepare and keep a up-to-date complete set of "as-built" records of all
permanent works on the blue prints which shall be corrected daily and shall show every changes
from the Contract Drawings or approved shop drawings including the exact as-built locations,
sizes and kinds of works, etc. This set of drawings shall be kept at the site office of the Contractor
and shall be available, at any time, for the inspection of the Engineer. These drawings shall be
used only for the purposes of record.
b. In addition, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, prepare and submit to the Engineer as-built
drawings of the total permanent works required under the Contract, which shall show the entire
permanent works as they have been executed. Such drawings shall be prepared for the portions of
the works completed as the works proceed and shall be submitted to the Engineer for his
inspection and approval whenever required. The drawings shall be identified by the works, title,
serial number, etc., and the final drawing numbers shall be entered when all as-built drawings are
completed and are arranged in proper order.
c. The Contractor shall submit 1 (one) inked original and its 5 (five) copies, and 1 (one) flashdisk
for computer or CD and its 5 (five) copies of as-built drawings of A3 size upon the completion of
the works. Prior to the preparation of the drawings, the Contractor shall obtain the approval from
the Engineer as to the size of the drawings, quality of transparent sheets, method of preparing
drawings and other details. No Certificate of Completion of the Work shall be issued by the
Engineer before the Contractor submits as-built drawings specified herein.
1E Sheet 2 of 2
SECTION 1F
MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
1. GENERAL
This Section sets forth supplementary and additional provisions relating to materials, products,
equipment and workmanship required under this Contract.
2. MATERIALS
a. General
All materials used in the permanent works shall, unless otherwise stated in the respective sections
of the Specifications, be of first-class quality and comply with the following general requirements
and shall be procured in accordance with the procedures outlined in the following paragraphs.
b. Grade of Materials
When reference to a standard is made without indication of a specific grade, the materials shall
comply with the suitable grade thereof to be selected in consideration of their purposes and
approved by the Engineer.
c. Schedule of Materials
Schedule of materials stating full details of materials to be procured and to be used in the
permanent works shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer for approval prior to
placing the order. Any change of specification or landmark from the schedule shall be subject to
the approval of the Engineer. The Engineer has the right to reject materials which have already
installed but not in compliance with the approved quality. The Contractor shall replace such
materials in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer without any added expense to the
Employer.
d. Order of Materials
After obtaining the Engineer's approval, the Contractor shall place the order for materials in
accordance with the time schedule or at such other times as may be necessary. The Contractor
shall forward copies to the Engineer of all orders placed by him for the supply of materials to be
used in the permanent works.
e. Trade Names
Trade names of the materials indicated in the Contract Documents, if any, are intended only to
show the standard of the materials on which the design of the particular work is based and also to
avoid ambiguous descriptions of the materials on the Drawings and Specifications.
1F Sheet 1 of 2
The indication of the trade names, therefore, shall in no way be considered to limit the
acceptability of other products of equal or better functions, performances, reliability and
durability.
f. Packing
All materials shall be delivered to the site in such works as are normally used for transporting the
same to a tropical country and shall be identifiable in a manner to be acceptable to the Engineer.
3. WORKMANSHIP
a. The workmanship employed in all works shall be of first- class grade in terms of internationally
recognized standards of practice and the work shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
b. The Contractor shall make available highly experienced and reliable foremen for concrete works,
pile driving works, metal works, electric and utility works and equipment operators specially
trained to handle such equipment.
1F Sheet 2 of 2
SECTION 1G
TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
1. GENERAL
a. This Section sets forth general provisions regarding test and inspections required under the
Contract.
b. References
SECTION ID, PROGRAM OF WORK
2. TEST LABORATORY
a. The Contractor shall construct a site laboratory or provide an authorized laboratory at a

convenient place approved by the Engineer, where all required laboratory tests specified in
various sections of the Specifications shall be carried out.
b. The laboratory shall have sufficient working area and shall be equipped with all necessary
facilities, equipment, apparatus, tools, etc., and shall also be provided with a suitable store room.
c. The Contractor shall conduct and maintain the laboratory. However, the Engineer the right to use
the laboratory at any time he wishes. If so directed by the Engineer, the Contractor's activity in
the laboratory shall be limited to the normal working hours and shall be performed in the
presence of the Engineer.
3. TESTS
a. The Contractor shall carry out all tests required in the various sections of the Specifications
except for the tests expressly stipulated to be made by others in the presence and under the
supervision of the Engineer, and the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer three copies of fully
detailed test reports within one week from the completion of the respective tests or within such
time as may be specifically directed by the Engineer.
b. The Contractor shall supply and maintain complete testing equipment, apparatus, tools, gages,
instruments, etc., and shall provide all necessary materials, specialists and labor required for
carrying out the test (such as Concrete Compression Strength Test, Steel Tensile Strength Test,
CBR Test etc).
c. The Contractor shall prepare and supply, as directed by the Engineer, all samples, test pieces,
specimens, etc., required for the tests to be made by others as well as for the tests to be carried out
by him.
1G Sheet 1 of 3
d. Testing equipment, specialists and labors shall be provided in relation to the program of works
and on the basis that all specified tests can be completed within the normal working hours of one
shift only except for the tests of such nature that they are to be carried out continuously.
e. All tests shall generally be carried out in accordance with the requirements and procedures of
referenced standards or as directed by the Engineer. As for the testing methods, other approved
equivalent standards may applied. In such case, the Contractor shall submit beforehand copies of
such standards for the Engineer's approval.
f. The tests shall be considered as particularized, if the purpose or normal title of such tests is
specified.
1] For estimation purposes, the requirements of Indonesian standards, ASTM, JIS or similar
standards shall be taken into account.
2] Where the tests are specified to be carried out in a manner directed by the Engineer, the
requirements of the above-mentioned standards for similar tests shall be taken into account
for estimation purposes.
g. Unless otherwise expressly stated, all tests and the works in connection therewith shall be
considered as incidental to the permanent works which require such tests and all costs thereof
shall be deemed to be included in and covered by the unit prices of pay items of the permanent
works.
4. INSPECTION AND TESTS AT FACTORY
a. If so specified or directed by the Engineer, all materials to be used in the permanent works shall
be subject to the tests at the Factory by inspecting engineers who may be dispatched by the
Employer or the Engineer at the Contractor's cost. The Contractor shall ensure in his contracts
with suppliers or sub-contractors that the inspecting engineers will have access at all reasonable
times to manufacturer's and supplier's premises and be afforded every facilities and conveniences
for making inspection, taking samples, testing, etc.
b. The samples shall be taken and the tests shall be carried out in the presence of the inspecting
engineers by the Contractor or by the manufacturers without cost to the Employer, all in
accordance with practice normally employed for the procurement of respective materials, unless
requirements are otherwise specified in the respective sections of the Specifications.
c. The Contractor shall submit three copies of test reports of the manufacturer as soon as practicable
after the tests are completed.
5. SAMPLE OF MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP
Apart from sampling and testing materials at the mills, the Contractor shall furnish, at his cost,
samples of materials and workmanship in accordance with such reasonable requests of the Engineer
for his approval of materials and workmanship. Such samples may be retained by the Engineer and
used as the basis for approving the works and materials in the fields.
1G Sheet 2 of 3
6. TESTS AT THE SITE
a. Notwithstanding any previous inspections and tests, all materials delivered to the site shall be
subject to examinations and tests, if so directed by the Engineer.
1] All such examinations and tests shall be carried out by the Contractor at his cost in the
presence and under the supervision of the Engineer in accordance with normal practice in
respect of such examinations and tests, if the same may be carried out by the Contractor with
his staff and equipment available at the site.
2] Otherwise, the tests shall be made at a laboratory approved by the Engineer at the
Contractor's cost.
b. The Contractor shall submit the test report if all the tests are made by him, as specified in clause 4
above.
c. The Engineer shall have the right to reject any materials which do not comply with the
requirements of the Contract notwithstanding any previous approval thereof.
d. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any extra payment or extension of time for completion of
the works on account of the rejection of materials due to their non- compliance with the
requirements or of the waiting time reasonably required for carrying out the examination and
tests.
1G Sheet 3 of 3
SECTION 1H
SUBMITTALS
1. GENERAL
a. This Section sets forth general provisions regarding submittals required to the Contractor.
b. References
SECTION 1D, PROGRAMMER OF WORK
SECTION 1E, DRAWINGS
SECTION 1G, TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
2. DOCUMENTS SUPPLIED BY CONTRACTOR
The Contractor shall prepare and submit, to the Engineer for approval, the following documents in
a manner specified herein, unless otherwise required under various sections of the Specifications
or unless otherwise requested by the Engineer.
a. Reports, Instructions and the Like
1] Reports and records of all tests on materials to be used for the permanent works carried
out by the Contractor or by his suppliers shall be submitted to the Engineer not later than
14 days or as directed by the Engineer before they are to be applied to the respective
works.
2] Brochures and technical literatures of all equipment and fixtures which are to be
permanently installed in the works such as supplier’s drawings and documents including
specifications, data, port lists and recommended spare parts, shall be submitted to the
Engineer not later than 14 days or as directed by the Engineer prior to their installation.
3] All instructions, in the form of lists, manuals and the like, which are required by the
Engineer for the purpose of operation, maintenance and repair of equipment, structures
and facilities shall be submitted to the Engineer within 14 days after the receipt of the
Engineer's order.
b. Drawings and Calculations
1] Survey and sounding drawings as required by the Specifications shall be submitted to the
Engineer within 7 days after the completion of the work concerned.
2] Drawings and calculations for all temporary works including drawings and calculations
for any part of permanent structures which are fully or partially used as temporary works
or as a support thereof shall be submitted to the Engineer not later than 14 days prior to
commencement of the temporary works.
3] General layout plan of the temporary work yard shall be submitted to the Engineer within
30 days after the date of issuance of the Notice to Proceed the Work.
4] Structural calculations for temporary construction and erection stages of the permanent
structures shall be submitted to the Engineer not later than 7 days prior to such
1H Sheet 1 of 4
occurrence, inclusive of determination of the strength and stability of already completed
structural members, insofar as additional loads occur to them in the course of the
execution of the construction work.
5] Drawings and calculations in connection with the execution of the special construction
method or sequence for construction or erection of the permanent structures or parts
thereof shall be submitted to the Engineer not later than 14 days prior to applying such
alteration and special construction method or sequence.
6] Shop drawings, calculations and specifications for all special equipment or construction
materials, for which the manufacturing firms normally do not supply shop drawings shall
be submitted to the Engineer not later than 14 days prior to the commencement of related
works. At least brochures with sketches on basic shape, installation dimensions and the
like must be supplied in order to enable the Engineer to make an evaluation and check.
7] Detailed shop drawings as required under the various sections of the Specifications shall
be submitted to the Engineer not later than 14 days prior to the commencement of the
respective works.
8] Drawings of site measurement and quantity calculation, listed and the like shall be
submitted to the Engineer within 7 days after the completion of the measurement of
respective works.
9] As-built drawings for all works showing all changes undertaken in the course of the
construction work shall be submitted to the Engineer until the issuance of the Taking-
Over Certificate of the Works.
c. Certificates related to :
a. Equipment
b. Materials
c. Tests (Type Tests and Shop Test Certificates)
d. Guarantees
a. Equipment Manufacturers Guarantees and Service Availability

b. Spare Parts Availability
c. Paint Warranties
3. PROCEDURE OF APPROVAL
a. Documents to be submitted by the Contractor and to be approved by the Engineer shall be

prepared to the following procedures basically. The time for submission of the documents
described in clause 2 hereinbefore shall be interpreted in conjunction with necessary period
for obtaining the approval from the Engineer as detailed hereunder. The Engineer, however,
reserves the right to reasonably extend the period for his check and review, upon written
notice of his intention to the Contractor, of the documents submitted depending on the
importance and volume, in the opinion of the Engineer, of such documents. In no case, the
Contractor shall be entitled to claim any extension of time for completion of the work arising
there from.
b. The Contractor shall submit 2 sets of preliminary documents required to the Engineer's office
in Jakarta. All such documents shall be marked "Preliminary". After review and checking, the
Engineer will send 1 [one] set of documents with comments back to the Contractor within 2
(two) week after receipt of the documents.
1H Sheet 2 of 4
c. The Contractor shall correct or supplement the documents as required by the Engineer, after
which he will submit 4 copies to the Engineer for his review.
1] If still not approved by the Engineer, documents will again be sent back from Engineer's
Jakarta office within 2 (two) week after receipt of second submission of the documents
for corrections, supplementations and resubmitted.
2] If approved, the Engineer will mark each document "Approved" and send them from
Jakarta office within 2 (two) week after receipt of re-submission as follows.
a] Retain 1 [one] copy for Engineer's file
b] 1 [one] copy to the head office or the site office of the Employer
c] 2 copies to the Contractor
3] Reproducible copies of approved documents or drawings shall be submitted by the

Contractor when required by the Engineer.
4. SUBMITTAL FORMULA
a. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer for approval the formula of submittal
to be used for all submittals required under the Contract to simplify the exchange of letter
between the Engineer and the Contractor.
b. Formula shall contain at least the following descriptions.
1] Name of Project and Contract number

2] Type of formula
3] Address to and attention to
4] Serial number
5] Date
6] Reference
7] Title, item and quantity of submittal
8] Identification such as for review and comments, for approval, for record or for
information
9] First submission or re-submission
10] Remarks
11] Name, title and signature of the person who is authorized to submit the documents under
the name of the Contractor
5. DAILY LOG, WEEKLY REPORT AND MONTHLY REPORT
a. The Contractor shall maintain a daily log describing important events pertaining to the works,
the working hours, the number of laborers employed, effective operation time of equipment,
overtime hours, delays due to meteorological and maritime conditions, the lack of labor,
materials or equipment, progress made, and instructions, notifications and recommendations
made by the Engineer. The log shall be submitted daily and approved by the Engineer.
b. The Contractor shall report to the Engineer, of the weekly report on Tuesday of every week
indicating progress made, equipment and materials employed or used, laborers employed and
all important events in relation to the works.
1H Sheet 3 of 4
c. The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer 17 copies of the monthly report within 7 days
after the end of every month, indicating progress made, invoice for last month, inventories of
material used and stored on jobsite, numbers of laborers, equipment available and hours
utilized, the summary of the daily log of the month and all important events in relation to the
works.
d. All items described in and forms of the daily log, weekly report and monthly report shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineer.
6. PHOTOGRAPHS
a. The Contractor shall include, in the monthly report above, photographs relevant to the work
progressed during the period.
b. Whenever required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit 3 copies of photographs
relevant to the work, necessary to record, in the opinion of the Engineer, that the work has
been in accordance with the Specifications or other necessities to record, within 10 days after
the said photographs were taken or as directed by the Engineer.
c. The Contractor shall take panorama view photographs of the site from two different points
and locations to show the whole activities and progress of the works. Such photographs shall
be taken monthly after the commencement of the work up to completion of the whole works.
Points and locations where such photographs are taken from shall not be changed unless
otherwise permitted by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit such photographs monthly
at the time of monthly report being submitted in 3 sets and in size sufficient to understand the
activity and progress of the work. Each print shall be accurately dated and identified for
future reference.
d. The Contractor shall provide and submit 4 sets of albums showing all photographs taken
during the construction period according to the sequence of the works progressed, at the time
of submitting the as-built drawings to the Engineer.
1H Sheet 4 of 4
SECTION 1 I
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
FOR
THE ENGINEER AND HIS STAFF
1. GENERAL
a. This Section sets forth temporary facilities and equipment which shall be provided and
maintained by the Contractor for the Engineer and his staff.
b. SECTION 1C, TEMPORARY WORKS describes the temporary work required to the
Contractor for the execution and maintenance of the works.
c. The Contractor shall construct, provide, maintain, demolish and clear away, as required and
when directed by the Engineer, the temporary facilities and equipment specified herein for the
Engineer and his staff, all at the Contractor's expense and responsibility during the entire
period of the Project. This period means not the construction period of the Contractor but also
including 6 months of the Defect Liability Period.
d. The Contractor shall submit, for the Engineer's approval, the drawings, catalogues and
brochures of the temporary facilities and equipment required herein within 2 weeks after the
Notice to Proceed the Works.
2. OFFICE
a. Within 60 days after the Notice to Proceed the Work, the Contractor shall provide 1 (one) site
office per 1 (one) site for use of the Engineer and his staff minimum 5.00 x 10.00 = 50.00 m2.
b. Location of the office shall be within or near the work yard. The exact location shall be
directed by the Engineer. The office shall not be limited to but cover at least the followings.
1] One office room with a floor area of 5 m x 4 m
2] Two bed rooms with a floor area of 3 m x 3 m for each room
3] One kitchen with a floor area of 2 m x 3 m
4] One toilets and one shower room with a floor area of 1.5 m x 2 m each
c. Construction
The Contractor shall construct and furnish the building in accordance with the following
specifications and as directed by the Engineer. All materials, equipment, furniture, etc., to be
used in the works shall be new unless otherwise specially permitted by the Engineer.
1I Sheet 1 of 4
1] Foundation : Stone masonry
2] External wall : Double side teak plywood, teak oil polished, above 1 m height of
concrete block
3] Partition wall : - ditto -
4] Beam and column : Reinforced concrete
5] Floor : Plain concrete with vinyl tile
6] Roof : Corrugated metal sheet
7] Ceiling : Suspended grid concealed with 4 mm plywood
8] Door : Wood flush door with external fly screen and cylinder lock
9] Window : Standard sliding window with clear glass for office and obscured
glass for toilets with external fly screen and curtain
10] Internal finish : Vinyl paint finish, 1.5 cm thick plaster with vinyl paint finish on
concrete block
11] Sanitary fitting : European type water closet for toilet equipped with a wash basin
and shower fitting for shower room
12] Drainage : Connecting sanitary fittings to temporary drains and to septic

tanks
13] Lighting : Adequate fluorescent ceiling lightings with shades
14] Socket outlets : Adequate number of socket outlets for electricity for each room
15] Water supply : Adequate amount of water supply and its outlets.
16] Kitchen apparatus : Equipment for cooking for the kitchen
17] Electrical power : Electrical power supply by generator set Supply
18] Miscellaneous : Equipment for washing & cleaning
d. The Contractor may provide a ready-made prefabricated office which is equivalent in area
and number of rooms as specified above, if the Contractor has proposed the same in his
Tender subject to the approval of the Engineer.
e. Furniture and Equipment
The following furniture and equipment for the office shall be provided by the Contractor
where and as directed by the Engineer. All furniture and equipment are subject to the
approval of the Engineer prior to be provided to the office.
1I Sheet 2 of 4
Furniture and equipment Q'ty required
Working desk wood, with chair, size 140x70x72cm, min 3
Drawing rack, A1 size 1
Drawing table Ao size, complete with drawing machine and chair 1 set
Conference table, size 1 m x 2 m, min. 1
Chairs for conference table 6
Filing cabinet, steel, size 90 x 180 x 45 cm, min. 1
Computer (PC) &, Printer 1 set
Fireproof safe 1
Cupboard, wood, size 90 x 180 x 45 cm, min. 2
Copying machine (The contractor's copy machine shall be -

allowed for use by the Engineer's staff).
White board (90 cm x 60 cm) 2
Drawing utensils 1 set
Kitchen utensils 1
Bed, Sheets and pillow 2 set
Electric Fan 3 set
Handy talky, with rechargeable battery pack 2 set

(1 set consisted of 2 handy talkies)
Battery charger 1 set
Out door antenna with cable 1 set
f. The Contractor shall bear the expense for providing the Engineer and his staff with
accommodations, until completion of above mentioned residences from the date of Notice to
Proceed the Work.
3. TRANSPORTATION
The Contractor shall provide transportation between city and project site to the Engineer for
execution of his duty during supervision work as follows
1I Sheet 3 of 4
4. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
a. The Contractor shall operate and maintain all temporary facilities and equipment required
herein at his own cost and responsibility including cost for repairing, renewing or replacing
the works when required and cost for supplying all necessary materials, articles and things
including, but not by way of limitation, supply of water, electricity, stationary, etc., and
rendering of all other services which are normally necessary for the efficient running of the
office, of the supervisor.
b. Should the Contractor fail to maintain, repair or replace any work when it is required or fail to
supply any material, article or thing necessary within the time required by the Engineer, the
Engineer may execute or cause to be executed by others such maintenance, repair or replacing
works and procure materials, articles and things from suitable sources and the Contractor shall
make payments thereof as certified and as demanded by the Engineer or the Engineer’s
Representative shall have the right to deduct the sums from any money which is due or
becomes due to the Contractor.
5. DELAY OF WORK
a. If there is any delay in providing the temporary facilities specified herein, the Contractor shall
provide, at his cost, the under-mentioned to the Engineer for immediate purposes until they
are completed or become available for use.
1] Temporary office until the required office is completed or made available for use.
2] Accommodation until residences are completed or become available for use.
b. The Engineer reserves the right to suspend any relevant works of the Contract which, in the
opinion of the Engineer, cannot be executed without supervision of the Engineer, should the
completion of the temporary works required herein not to be delayed.
6. REMOVAL AND CLEARING
a. Upon completion of the Contract or at such time as may be directed by the Engineer, the
Contractor shall remain such temporary works and shall deliver to the Employer without any
additional cost to the Employer.
1I Sheet 4 of 4
SECTION 2A
RECLAMATION
1. SCOPE
a. This Section shall apply to the reclamation work to be carried out under the
Contract.
2. GENERAL
a. Sub-soil and topographic data provided with the Tender Documents shall be
considered as the general information only. The Contractor shall carry out the
site survey such as hydrographic and topographic survey of the site as necessary
for construction of the work. The Contractor shall submit, within 2 weeks after
the commencement of the work, the detailed plan and schedule of the survey
work including equipment and manpower to be employed, to the Engineer for
approval. Survey work shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements
stipulated in SECTION 1C, TEMPORARY WORKS hereinbefore.
b. The Contractor shall be deemed to have satisfied himself as to the nature of the
sub-soil and topographic conditions and as to all other particulars whatsoever of
the site. Any variation between data provided with the Tender Documents and
hose actually exist at site shall not affect the terms of the Contract against this
work.
c. The Contractor shall be deemed to include in his price all cost and expense for
site survey, construction and maintenance of the work as well as all allowances
such as loss of materials during transportation and filling, filling materials
sinking into the ground, settlement of the ground due to filling and all other
factors that may arise during or in connection with the reclamation work.
d. The Contractor shall take precautions, in every aspect, against environmental

pollution during the reclamation works.
3. SURVEY
a. Topographic survey to be carried out by the Contractor as required above shall

be performed by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer and agreed level
of the area to be reclaimed shall be established and recorded in writing and
signed by the Engineer and the Contractor. After the reclamation work is
completed, the Contractor shall survey the reclaimed area and records shall
be agreed in writing and signed by the Engineer and the Contractor.
b. All such survey work shall be performed in a manner stipulated in SECTION

1C, TEMPORARY WORKS hereinbefore.
2A Sheet 1 of 3
4. FILLING MATERIAL
a. Sandy materials for filling shall be free of harmful amount of soluble

substances, and shall comply with AASHTO M 57 or equivalent.
b. The Contractor shall, at his own expenses and responsibility, investigate and
research the borrow pit where the adequate filling materials can be obtained in
quality and in quantity. Samples and test results of filling material shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to the commencement of the work.
c. Despite the Engineer's previous approval of filling material and borrow pit,
the Engineer reserves the right to suspend any operation in connection with
filling if, in his opinion, the filling material is not suitable for the work. In such
case, the Contractor shall comply with the instructions from the Engineer.
5. RECLAMATION
a. Prior to the commencement of the work, the Contractor shall remove debris’s,
tree roots, used wire ropes and all other unsuitable materials for the
reclamation from the site to the area designated by the Engineer.
b. Filling sand above MSL shall be spread evenly in layers not exceeding 300
mm loose thickness by mechanical or other means which will not invite
segregation and shall be compacted by approved means.
c. During the filling operation, the Contractor shall control and direct construction
traffic in such manner as to ensure its uniform movement over the reclaimed
area. Construction traffic may continue to use any surface formed in the
reclaimed area, however, the top surface shall be regularly graded and
maintained in a condition free from pools of water. Should the surface be
damaged by erosion or otherwise, the Contractor shall, at his responsibility
and cost, make recovery of such area in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
d. The Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to avoid the slip failure and
damage to the permanent works or other items during the reclamation work.
e. Tolerance of the reclaimed formation level from those shown on the

Drawings shall be 15 cm (upward) and 5 cm (downward), unless specifically
directed by the Engineer.
6. SETTLEMENT
a. The Contractor shall check all results of surveys and all formation, levels and
slopes before commence that the construction works.
b. The Contractor may propose the measure to minimize the maintenance work
against settlement of the reclaimed area during the period of defects liability. In
any case, such proposal shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and all
cost arising there from shall be borne by the Contractor.
c. The Contractor shall supply, install and maintain all necessary materials and
equipment for monitoring the settlement and the lateral soil movement, and
2A Sheet 2 of 3
conduct the periodical monitoring. Such equipment shall be installed in
accordance with the requirements therein. The cost of equipment shall be deemed
to be included in unit prices of reclamation.
d. The measurement for payment at the completion of the work, in case the
Contractor's proposal for over reclamation is approved by the Engineer, shall be
carried out as if the levels of required formation level plus approved over
reclamation height are the required formation levels and differences there from
shall be within the tolerances specified above. In no case, the volume of over
reclaimed materials shall be paid for.
2A Sheet 3 of 3
SECTION 2B
REVETMENT
1. SCOPE
a. This Section shall apply to the revetment work to be carried out under the
Contract.
b. References
SECTION 1C, TEMPORARY WORKS
SECTION 2C, EARTH WORK
SECTION 2E, CONCRETE
2. GENERAL
a. Sub-soil and topographic data provided in the Tender Documents shall be considered
as the general information’s only. The Contractor shall carry out the site survey such
as hydrographic and topographic survey of the site as necessary for construction of
the work. The Contractor shall submit, within 2 weeks after the commencement of
the work, the detailed plan and schedule of the survey work including equipment
and manpower to be employed, to the Engineer for approval. Such survey work may
be carried out as a part of survey work for reclamation and detailed clarification
of each survey shall be included in his plan of survey in such case. In any case,
survey work shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements stipulated in
SECTION 1C, TEMPORARY WORKS.
b. The Contractor shall submit, his construction plan and schedule including the detailed
description and illustration of construction method and equipment to be employed to
the Engineer for approval.
c. The Contractor shall be deemed to have satisfied himself as to the nature of the sub-
soil and topographic conditions and as to all other particulars whatsoever of the site.
Any variation between data provided with the Tender Documents and those actually
exist at site shall not affect the terms of the Contract against this work.
d. The Contractor shall be deemed to include all cost and expense for site survey,
construction and maintenance of the works as well as all allowances such as loss
of filling materials during transportation and filling, settlement of the ground due
to filling and all other factors that may arise during or in connection with the
revetment work.
e. The Contractor may have, subject to the approval of the Engineer, the option to work
continuously by day and by night and on locally recognized holidays in case
dredging work will be applied for revetment work.
2B Sheet 1 of 5
3. SURVEY AND SOUNDING
a. Topographic and sounding survey to be carried out by the Contractor as required

above shall be performed by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer and
agreed levels before the construction of the revetment shall be established and
recorded in writing and signed by the Engineer and the Contractor.
b. Survey and sounding works shall be carried out for every stages of construction of
the revetment such as placing of fill material, placing of rubble stone, placing armour
stone, and others depending on the design of the revetment, prior to proceeding to
the next stage in the presence of the Engineer. It is the Contractor's responsibility to
remedy the work if the result of such survey shows levels beyond the acceptable
tolerance at his cost to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
4. MATERIAL
a. General
The requirements for material prescribed herein are provided to specify the
requirements for material which is generally utilized for the revetment. In case the
Contractor proposes to use material other than specified herein, the Contractor shall
submit detailed data of such material such as specification and drawings to the
Engineer for approval when he submits the detailed design of the work.
b. Rock Material
1) The natural rock to be used for rubble stone shall conform to the requirements
of JIS A 5006 (compressive strength 500 kg/cm2 or more, unit weight 2.5 to 2.7
ton/m3) or approved equal, and shall be obtained from an approved quarry, and
each stone shall be within certain range of weight according to the location
as shown on the Drawings, unless otherwise specially permitted by the Engineer.
2) Natural stone for armour rock, in case applied, each stone shall be within certain
range of weight, according to the location as shown on the Drawings and
subject to the approval of the Engineer on sample and test report.
3) Despite his previous approval of the borrow area, the Engineer reserves the right
to suspend any operation in connection with riprap fills, if the riprap materials
are found not suitable for the works. In such case, the Contractor shall comply
with the Engineer's instruction.
c. Sand
1) The Contractor shall investigate and research, at his own expense and
responsibility, the borrow pit where the adequate filling sand can be obtained in
quantity and quality. Samples and test results of filling sand shall be submitted to
the Engineer for approval prior to the commencement of the work.
2) Despite the Engineer's previous approval of filling sand and borrow pit, the
Engineer reserves the right to suspend any operation in connection with filling,
2B Sheet 2 of 5
if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the filling sand is not suitable for the work.
In such case, the Contractor shall comply with the Engineer's instruction.
d. Fabric Sheets
1) Materials for fabric sheets, which may be used for permeable sheet on the riprap
mound surface, shall satisfy the following requirements or equivalent, and subject
to the approval of the Engineer prior to the commencement of the work.
2) Contractor must give the detail proposed that completed with certificate of test and
8 (eight) samples of geotextile that measured 400 m x 400 m to Engineer.
The give of samples are not less than 1 (one) month before installing. No
geotextile that installed before approving from Supervision Consultant.
The geotextile that installed must has some properties and specification as follows;
- Tensile strength : 15 kN/M
- Tensile elongation : 75/35 %
- Extension at break : 40 %
- Performance energy : 4.1 kN/m

(ave)
- CBR puncture strength : 2350

(md/cd)
- Dynamic drop cone : 23

Puncture (diam)
- Effective opening size : 0.10

(O 90)
- Vertical water flow 50 mm head : 85

100 mm head : 168
- Vertical Permeability 3 x 10 –3
- Horizontal water flow

20 k Pa 11
200 k Pa 2.9
- Nominal mass 200
- Thickness 2 k Pa 1.9
- Grab strength (md/cd) 920/810
- Grab elongation (md/cd) 75/40
- Rod puncture resistance 400
- Apparent opening sife (O95) 0.21
2B Sheet 3 of 5
- Permitivity 2.0
e. Concrete
Concrete to be used for the work shall conform to the requirements of SECTION
2E, CONCRETE.
5. PLACING
a. Rock Materials
1) Rock materials shall be dumped as uniformly as possible with the use of chutes or
other suitable means as approved by the Engineer.
2) The placing operation shall be carried out with frequent checking on the work
having done.
3) Surfaces of rubble stone which shall receive subsequent placement of fabric

sheets or armour rocks shall be leveled into even and uniform surfaces and
voids shall be filled with pebble stone and sand within a tolerance of + 5 cm
from levels and slopes approved by the Engineer.
b. Fabric Sheets
1) Prior to installation of fabric sheets, prepared surfaces of fill material shall

be inspected and approved by the Engineer.
2) Fabric sheets shall be placed as neat as possible without waving or gathering,

and with overlapping length more than 50 cm or as recommended by the
manufacturer.
c. Armour Rocks
1) Prior to installation of armour rocks, prepared surfaces of rubble stone shall

be inspected and approved by the Engineer.
2) Armour rocks shall be placed as uniformly and rigidly as possible with the use
of suitable equipment to place them within a tolerance of + 20 cm of levels or
slopes approved by the Engineer.
6. SAFETY MEASURES
To prevent the collision of dredging or filling equipment in operation or waiting with

other vessels, working lights or anchor lights and shapes shall be installed, provided
and maintained by the Contractor at night time and during daytime to meet the
requirements of safety precaution purpose, subject to the approval of the Engineer.
2B Sheet 4 of 5
7. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION MEASURES
It is the Contractor's responsibility to provide adequate and sufficient measures to

protect existing natural seawater, seabed or coasts, or any kind of structures from
further pollution than they exist due to execution of the work. Any matter arising there
from, during or in connection with the execution of dredging, filling or disposing
dredged materials shall be settled down by the Contractor under his sole responsibility.
2B Sheet 5 of 5
SECTION 2C
EARTH WORK
1. SCOPE
This Section sets forth general requirements applicable for earth work such as excavation and
backfilling to be carried out under the Contract.
2. GENERAL
a. Types of Materials Encountered
1) Unless expressly stated, the nature of materials to be excavated is unknown, therefore, all
such materials shall be designated as "unclassified materials".
2) It is expressly understood that the Contractor shall be deemed to be familiar with the soil
conditions and whatsoever in respect to the types of materials encountered in the
excavation.
3) The schedule rates entered by the Contractor shall be deemed to include costs to cover all
factors which may be encountered during or in connection with the excavation.
b. Excavated materials required and approved for backfill shall be stockpiled in areas and
manners approved by the Engineer. Excavated materials unsuitable or excessed in quantity of
backfill shall be remove from the site by the Contractor to the place where the Engineer
designates.
c. Each phase of excavation and backfilling work shall be approved by the Engineer as
completed prior to removing earth work equipment from the site or prior to proceeding with
subsequent operations which cover or disturb such completed phases of work.
d. The Contractor shall provide adequate means of protection to adjacent construction during
excavation or backfilling.
3. EXCAVATION
a. Excavation may be made by hand or machine to suit the foundations, structures or others for
which excavations are required. Prior to the commencement of any particular excavations,
the Contractor shall submit his proposals with regard to the outline thereof to the Engineer
for approval.
b. Excavation depth and width shall be as shown on the approved shop drawings required to
be submitted by the Contractor, provided that clearance from structure shall be min. 50 cm,
wherever possible, on all sides of the structure.
c. The Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to ensure that excavated surfaces on
which concrete or others are to be placed are kept clean and dry. The Contractor shall
be allowed to provide cut-off drain, trenches, ditches, sumps, etc., necessary to prevent
2C Sheet 1 of 2
ground water or water from any other source from draining into the excavated areas during
construction.
d. The Contractor shall provide all temporary support or shuttering necessary to prevent any
movement or falling due to excavation as approved by the Engineer. The cost for such
support or shuttering or cost arising there from shall be included in his unit prices.
e. When over excavated, the Contractor shall correct by filling with compacted backfill
material as directed by the Engineer without additional cost to the Employer.
f. Where complete de-watering is required for the subsequent concrete work or others for which
excavation work is to be carried out, approved sheeting or shuttering shall be provided at the
expense of the Contractor.
g. Excavated surfaces where the subsequent concrete work or others are to be made thereon
shall be compacted, graded and trimmed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
4. BACKFILLING
a. Backfill materials shall be compactable and free of harmful amounts of water solute
substance, and shall be those used for sand replacement or reclamation work.
b. The Contractor may use excavated materials for backfilling for which the Contractor shall
submit the test report for the approval of the Engineer.
c. Backfill material shall be compacted, graded and trimmed to the formation levels shown on
the Drawings and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
2C Sheet 2 of 2
SECTION 2D
PILING
1. SCOPE
a. This Section includes all works required to supply and install steel pipe piles,
wooden piles, and its related work to be carried out under the Contract.
b. References

SECTION 2G, METAL WORK
2. GENERAL
a. Locations and levels of piles to be driven and dimension, size and length of piles
as required for constructing various structures of the works shall be as shown on
the Drawings.
b. The Contractor shall satisfy himself and shall be deemed to have satisfied himself
as to the nature of the subsoil conditions and as to other particulars whatsoever.
c. The Contractor shall be deemed to include in his schedule rates allowances to

cover all factors that may arise during or in connection with the piling work.
d. The following publications listed below, but referred to thereafter by basic

designation only, form a part of this Specification for steel pipe piles to the extent
indicated by the reference thereto.
1) JIS G 3444 : Carbon Steel Tubes for General Structural Purposes

2) SKK 400 :
3) ASTM A 252 : Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe Pile
4) AWS D1.1 : Structural Welding code
e. The Contractor shall submit, for the Engineer's approval, detailed shop drawings
showing procedure and method of pile fabrication, method and sequence of
piling operation and details of the guides for piling if employed prior to the
commencement of the work.
3. MATERIALS
a. Steel pipe piles shall be either seamless or welded, and be of sizes and dimensions
as shown on the Drawings.
Unless requirements are waived in writing, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer 2 copies of test report certifying that steel pipe piles which the
Contractor intends to apply for the work shall meet the requirements of the
Specifications.
2D Sheet 1 of 6
4. FABRICATION
a. Steel Pipe Piles
1) The manufacturer shall fabricate piles to diameter and with material thickness
as shown on the Drawings and to the longest length practicable for shipping.
2) Where required length are greater than the length of pile shipped, the
extension of such piles and any other miscellaneous work required on the
piles prior to driving shall be accomplished at the temporary work yard of
the Contractor in accordance with clause 9, "Splicing" hereinafter, unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer.
3) Welding work shall comply with all requirements for welding specified under
SECTION 2G, METAL WORK.
4) All piles which have passed the test at factory shall be marked with the
following data in a manner not to be easily destroyed or erased.
a) Grade of pile
b) Dimensions
c) Production number
d) Name of manufacturer
5. STORAGE AND HANDLING
a. All piles shall be stored and handled in such manner as will not inflict any
damages thereupon.
b. Piles may be stored in open air when stacked on wooden pallets to be placed at 4
m intervals max. along length of piles.
c. Piles shall not be stacked more than 3 tiers high.
6. DRIVING
a. Setting Out
1) The Contractor shall properly set out the center of each pile position and shall
establish position and level marks by means of triangulation and return
leveling.
2) Setting out and marks shall be effectively protected until the permanent works
are completed.
3) In order to obtain the correct position and direction of piles, stable staging or
markers shall be constructed at the site.
2D Sheet 2 of 6
4) All works stated herein shall be subject to the Engineer's approval.
b. Equipment
All the piling equipment shall be the type generally used in standard pile driving
practice and shall be suitable to the driving of piles shown on the Drawings at site.
c. Driving
1) Piles shall be driven as light as possible at the beginning with sufficient

precautions against shifting in position or inclination and shall be driven by the
full impact after confirming the accurate position and plumb or angle as
required. Any cushion material which becomes frayed or causes an eccentric
action of the hammer shall be removed and replaced.
2) Piles shall be driven in their exact positions and to the plumb within a
tolerance of 10 cm from the true position of piles and 1:100 from the axis of
the pile for the angle of batter piles when the piles are driven to the final
depth.
3) Piles shall be driven continuously and without voluntary interruption until the
required depth of penetration and penetration rate per blow has been
obtained. The internationally recognized dynamic driving formula, such as
Hiley's Formula, shall be utilized to compute and confirm the required
bearing force has obtained. Required bearing capacities for each pile will be
directed by the Engineer prior to commencing the work.
4) Piles which showed sufficient bearing and pulling capacity before the
required penetration shown on the Drawings may not be required to penetrate
until the required depth subject to the approval of the Engineer. On the
contrary, piles which have not reached the required bearing and pulling
capacity when the top has been driven to the cut-off elevations shall be
spliced as specified hereinafter and driven to a depth sufficient to develop the
required bearing and pulling capacity, or additional piles shall be driven to
cover insufficiency of bearing and pulling capacity of these piles as directed
and approved by the Engineer.
d. Piles which have been uplifted after being driven shall be redriven to the required
penetration after completing other driving activities in nearby areas.
e. Any pile so injured in driving or handling that its structural integrity as a pile
under the conditions of use is impaired shall be replaced by a new pile or the
injured part shall be replaced by splicing or otherwise repaired as directed by the
Engineer, in any case without additional cost to the Employer.
f. Record of Driving
A complete pile driving report of each pile shall be submitted to the Engineer
daily. The complete record in tabular form of each pile driven shall include the
pile number, batter or vertical designation, location, time and date driven,
penetration depth, size of pile, size of hammer used, ground elevation, tip
elevation, number of blows for each centimeter for the final 30 centimeters of
2D Sheet 3 of 6
driving, rebound, total number of blows, height of ram, length of pile, elevation
of splicing and any abnormality observed.
7. PILE LOAD
Ultimate load for each type and location of piles are shown on the table below.
ULTIMATE LOAD (Ton)
Wharf Trestle
Vertical Batter Vertical
Port
Comp. Comp. Pull Comp.
(ton) (ton) (ton) (ton)
Jetty of PT. Soma 145 390 255 100

Daya Utama
8. CUT-OFF
The tops of piles shall be pulled into line if necessary, fixed in position, cut-off
truly perpendicular to the axis of the piles at the elevation designated in the
Drawings. The piles may be cut by means of a gas cutter or other suitable approved
equipment.
9. SPLICING
a. Welding joints of pile to fabricate full length pile as shown in the Drawings shall
be carried out at the Contractor's work yard.
b. Either at the work yard or at the driving site, piles shall be extended by welding
a pile of the same section and a suitable length.
c. If the edge of the pile is damaged, the pile shall be cut by gas cutter truly
perpendicular to the axis of the pile, and the edge prepared as required and
surface including neighboring areas shall be well cleaned of any moisture, rust,
paint, oil slug or other foreign substances. The edge to be welded shall be
carefully matched and the root opening shall be kept precisely even with the use
of spacers and stoppers.
d. Welding works shall be in accordance with the requirement of welding specified

in SECTION 2G, METAL WORK. Testing method on welded joints shall be
approved by the Engineer prior to the commencement of the work.
10. COATING
Surface of steel piles embedded into and covered by concrete shall not be coated
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. If the coating on the surface of steel piles
2D Sheet 4 of 6
required, the Contractor shall submit shop drawings for application of such coating
including details of material to be applied for coating.
11. PILE JACKET
a. Pile jacket for protection of steel pipe piles against corrosion in splash zone
shall be provided as shown on the Drawings.
b. Prior to placing the forms of pile jacket, the surface of steel pipe piles shall be
cleaned and all rust, oil or other extraneous material shall be removed to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
c. Concrete work shall be performed in accordance with SECTION 2E,

CONCRETE. The class of concrete to be used for shall be class "B", or mortar
grout as specified in the same.
12. TEMPORARY BRACING
Temporary bracing of piles shall be provided by the Contractor until they are fixed
by the superstructure without additional cost to the Employer.
13. WOODEN PILE
Wooden piles shall be driven under the foundation of Go-down, harbour lamp. The
Contractor shall submit detail proposal of shap drawings before installation.
Type, diameter, length and quality of wooden piles shall be unless otherwise specified
in the drawings of quality II class of wood or equivalent approved by the Engineer.
The unit price entered against this item shall include and cover all cost and expenses
for material, transportation to the site and driving.
Driving of wooden pile shall be measured by members of pile to the designated

position and elevation within the tolerance of 5 cm as approved by the Engineer.
14 PRE-AUGERING
Pre-augering work shall be applied so that pile can penetrate the design length into
the layers of hard soil or soft rock layer, in which simple driving of pile can not
obtain the design penetration length, as shown in the Drawing.
The sequence of construction of Pre-augering work as follows:
1. Pile shall be driven with proper hammer until the elevation of practically reject to
avoid the damage of steel pipe pile for local buckling.
Actual this suspension of pile driving at reject elevation shall be approved by
Engineer.
2. Drilling machine shall be put into the driven pile.

Diameter of auger of drilling machine shall be less than one of steel pipe pile by
100mm to 150 mm.
3. Pre-augering shall be made from the above rejected elevation to design elevation
2D Sheet 5 of 6
with the drilling machine.
Over drilling below the design pile tip elevation shall not be allowed.
The barge mounting the drilling machine shall be properly fixed to prevent the
horizontal moving of vessel during the drilling work.
Actual elevation the Pre-augering shall be approved by Engineer.
4. After the removing the drilling machine from the pile, pile shall be driven with
proper hammer until obtaining the design ultimate compressive capacity as
indicated in paragraph 7.
The pile driving work shall be finished on the same day with the Pre-augering
work.
The final driving results shall be approved by Engineer.
The Contractor shall mobilize the proper type of augering machine with enough length of
stem units so that the auger unit can reach the design pile tip elevation and with enough
spare of auger unit considering the consumable of the auger.
2D Sheet 6 of 6
SECTION 2E
CONCRETE
1. SCOPE
a. This Section includes all the cast-in-place concrete works and the related works.
b. This Section also sets forth general requirements applicable to other concrete works
c. Each Section under which the concrete work is required shall comply with requirements
herein as applicable.
2. GENERAL
a. Confer with Other Trades
Before commencing any concrete work, the Contractor shall confer with other trades to
ensure that all piping, conduits, sleeves, bolts, hangers, fixing lugs, timber fillets or
any other materials necessary to be installed or embedded in the concrete have to be fixed.
b. Code and Standard
Unless otherwise described herein, the works shall comply with the requirements of
"Peraturan Beton Bertulang Indonesia 1971, or “Tata Cara Pembuatan Benda Uji” SK SNI
T-16-1991-03 Peraturan Umum Bahan Bangunan Indonesia (PUBI) 1982, NI-2" and
"Peraturan Pembebanan Indonesia untuk Gedung 1983, NI-18". Dead loads, lives loads,
wind loads and seismic shall be assessed in accordance with "Peraturan Pembebanan
Indonesia untuk Gedung 1983", unless otherwise specified herein or shown on the
Drawings.
The following publications listed below, but referred thereafter by basic designation only,
from a part of this Specification, only these specifications shall be applied when the
provisions in NI-2 are not in conflict with or provisions shall be necessary for the works
but not exist in NI-2.
1] ACI Publication :
ACI 211.1 Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural Concrete
ACI 214 Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Compressive Test Results of

Field Concrete
ACI 305 Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting
ACI 315 Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete

Structure.
2E Sheet 1 of 18
2] ASTM Publication :
A 615 Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for concrete reinforcement
A 616 Rail-steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
A 617 Axle-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
C 31 Making and Curing Concrete Compressive and Flextural Strength Test

Specimens in the Field
C 33 Concrete Aggregate
C 39 Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimen
C 42 Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete
C 94 Ready Mixed Concrete
C 143 Slump of Portland Cement Concrete
C 150 Portland Cement
C 171 Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
C 172 Sampling Fresh Concrete
C 173 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method
C 192 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory
C 231 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method
C 260 Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
C 309 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete
C 494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
3] AWS Publication :
D 12.1 Welding Reinforcing Steel, Metal Inserts and Connections in Reinforced

Concrete Construction.
4] JIS Publication :
JIS G 3112 Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
2E Sheet 2 of 18
3. SUBMITTALS
a. Refer to SECTION 1H, SUBMITTALS
b. The Contractor shall submit his plan for mixing, batching, transporting, placing and
curing of concrete in detail including equipment to be employed in the respective
sequence of concrete work above mentioned.
c. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings, for the Engineer's approval, showing all
dimensions necessary for fabrication and placing of the reinforcing bars and
accessories, typical details of formworks, scaffoldings, construction methods, joints and
false-works together with stress and deflection analysis.
d. Samples of materials requested by the Engineer shall be furnished and approved before
delivery to the Site.
e. Certified copies of test reports or other satisfactory evidence where so specified and
certificates shall be furnished in accordance with the provision of SECTION 1 G and the
Engineer's approval shall be received by the Contractor before delivering the certified
or tested materials to the site.
f. Report of mixing and batching of concrete, and concrete strength test shall be submitted
to the Engineer for approval as specified hereinafter.
4. MATERIALS
a. General
All materials shall conform, in every aspect, to the requirements of the codes and
standards specified under this Section and in any respect subject to the Engineer's
approval.
b. Admixtures
Admixtures containing chloride ions or other ions producing deleterious effects shall not
be used.
1] Air-Entraining Admixtures shall conform to ASTM C 260 or equivalent
2] Admixture other than air-entraining agent shall conform to ASTM C 494 or

equivalent
To avoid crack caused by expansion or shrinkage, to reduce permeability and to

increase durability of concrete, pure polypropylene fibre can be used for concrete class
B. This kind of additive material shall have a portion of 0.9 kg in each 1 m3 of concrete
and shall be mixed with all other concrete material together in the concrete mixer. The
requirement of pure polypropylene fibre are as follow:
Absorbtion = 0
Specific gravity = 0.9
Yield point = 160 - 170 C
Burn point = 570 C
Pull strength = 5,600 - 7,700 kg/m2
2E Sheet 3 of 18
c. Aggregates
1] Coarse Aggregate
Coarse aggregate shall conform to ASTM C 33 or (SII) 0052-80 Standar Industri

Indonesia and have nominal sizes of 38.0 mm to 19.0 mm, 19.0 mm to 9.5 mm,
9.5 mm to No.4 sieves. The material shall be well graded between the limits
indicated and individual stockpiles.
It is Contractor's responsibility to blend the materials to meet the gradation

requirements for various types of concrete as specified herein.
Nominal sizes for combined gradation shall be as follows:
Nominal size of coarse aggregates
____________________________________________________
ASTM Sieves % by weight passing
40 mm 25 mm 10 mm
______________________________________________________
50.0 mm (2") 100 - -

38.0 mm (1-1/2") 95 - 100 - -
31.8 mm (1-1/4") - 100 -
25.0 mm (1") - 90 - 100 -
19.0 mm (3/4") 35 - 70 - -
16.0 mm (5/8") - - 100
9.5 mm (3/8") 10 - 30 - 85 - 100
No.4 0-5 0 - 10 0 - 20
2] Fine Aggregate
Fine aggregate shall conform to ASTM C 33 or equivalent. Unless otherwise

required by the Engineer, the grading of fine aggregate shall be as follows :
_________________________________________
ASTM Sieves % by weight passing
__________________________________________
9.5 mm (3/8") 100

No. 4 90 - 100
No. 8 80 - 100
No. 16 50 - 90
No. 30 25 - 60
No. 50 10 - 30
No.100 2 - 10
Grading of fine aggregates shall be reasonably uniform and fineness modulus thereof
shall not vary more than 0.2% from that of representative sample on which mix
proportions of concrete are based.
2E Sheet 4 of 18
d. Anchorage Items
Inserts for anchoring mechanical items to concrete shall be of standard manufacture and
of types required to engage with the anchors to be provided and installed therein
under other sections of these Specification and shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
e. Cement
Cement to be used for the work shall be class I portland cement of the standard brand
approved by an authorized committee and shall comply with the requirements of NI-2 or
SII 0013-81. Only one brand of portland cement shall be used, unless otherwise permitted
by the Engineer.
f. Water
All water for mixing and curing concrete shall be fresh and clean water, free from any
deleterious matter to the concrete from the fresh water supply system or approved
source, and shall comply with the requirements of NI-2.
g. Curing Materials
1] Impervious Sheet Materials shall conform to ASTM C 171 or equivalent, except that
polyethylene film, if used, shall be white opaque.
2] Burlap shall be of commercial quality, non-staining type, consisting of 2 layers

minimum.
3] Membrane forming curing compound shall conform to ASTM C 309 or equivalent

and shall be required to submit evidence that products conform to the Specification.
h. Form Materials
Form materials, coatings and ties shall be specified in Clause 7, FORMWORK.
i. Reinforcement
Deformed bars shall conform to Indonesian Industrial Standard, "Baja Tulangan Beton"
SNI 07-2052-1990 BJTD 40 or JIS G 3112 SD 40.
5. SAMPLES AND TESTING
a. Refer to SECTION 1G, TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
b. Testing except as otherwise specified herein shall be performed by an approved testing

agency as proposed by the Contractor and at no additional cost to the Employer.
c. Cement
Cement shall be samples either at the mill or at the site of the works and tested by an
approved independent commercial or Contractor's testing laboratory at no additional
cost to the Employer. Certified copies of laboratory test reports shall be furnished for
2E Sheet 5 of 18
each lot of cement and shall include all test data, results, and certificates of the
sampling and testing procedures shall be in conformance with the Specification. No
cement shall be used until notice has been given by the Engineer that the test results are
satisfactory. Cement that has been stored, other than in bins at the mills, for more than
four (4) months after delivery to the site shall be retested before use. Cement
delivered at the site and test showed as unsuitable shall not be incorporated into the
permanent works.
d. Aggregates
1] Representative sample of the fine and coarse aggregates shall be subject to a grading
test separately prior to the commencement of the work in order to established the
proportions of concrete mix required to satisfied strength, density and workability.
Certificates of supplier for aggregates shall be conformed with the requirements of
this Specification and shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer for
approval.
Copies of the grading curves together with the Contractor's proposal for concrete mix
proportions of each class of concrete shall also be submitted to the Engineer for
approval prior to commencing any part of the concrete work.
2] Whenever required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall test on deliveries of

aggregates to ensure that the approved uniformity of the materials is maintained. The
Engineer reserves the right to reject the concrete work, or any part thereof, if the results
of this test of aggregates show inferior quality from those approved previously. In such
case, the Contractor shall comply with the instruction of the Engineer.
e. Reinforcement
Certified copies of mill certificates of tests shall accompany with deliveries of steel bar
reinforcement. If required by the Engineer, additional testing of the materials shall be
made at the Contractor's expenses.
f. Concrete
1] For test purposes, the Contractor shall take three (3) sets of test specimens, under the
supervision of the Engineer from each 50 cu.m or fraction thereof of each class of
concrete placed, shall be taken. At least one (1) set of test specimens, consisting of two
(2) test specimens shall be taken from a separate batch of concrete placed in each 8-
hours shift., shall be provided. Samples shall be secured in conformance with ASTM C
172 or equivalent. Test specimens shall be made, cured and packed for shipment in
accordance with ASTM C 31 or equivalent. Cylinders shall be tested at the expense
of the Contractor in accordance with ASTM C 39 or equivalent. Each test specimen
will be evaluated by the Engineer for meeting the requirements of the Specification.
The standard test age shall be 28 days, but 7 days tests may be used by the
permission of the Engineer provided that the relation between the 7 days and 28 days
strengths on the concrete is established by tests for the materials and proportions used.
When samples fail to conform to the requirements for strength, the Engineer shall have
the right to order the change in the proportions of the concrete mix for the remaining
portions of the work at no additional cost to the Employer.
2E Sheet 6 of 18
2] When the results of the strength tests on the control specimens indicate the concrete
placed does not meet the Specification requirements or where there is other evidence
that the quality of the concrete is below the Specification requirements, tests on core of
inplace concrete shall be made in conformity with ASTM C 42 or equivalent. Core
specimens shall be obtained by the Contractor and shall be tested. Any deficiency shall
be corrected or, if the Contractor elects, the Contractor may submit a proposal for
approval that a load test to be made. If the proposal is approved, the load test shall
be made by the Contractor and the test results shall be evaluated by the Engineer in
conformance with ACI 318. The cost of the load tests shall be borne by the Contractor.
If any concrete shows evidence of failure during the load test or fails the load test as to
be evaluated, the deficiency shall be corrected. Any deficiency shall be corrected in a
manner approved by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Employer.
g. Admixtures
All admixtures shall be tested and those that have been in storage at the Site for longer
than 6 months shall not be used until proved by re-test.
1] Air-Entraining Admixture shall be tested in conformity with the referenced

specification. The testing shall be conducted with cement and aggregate proposed for
the works.
2] Other admixtures, if approved, shall be tested in conformity with the referenced

specification. The testing shall be conducted with cement and aggregates proposed for
the work.
6. STORAGE
Storage accommodations for concrete materials shall be subject to approval and shall afford
easy access for inspection and identification of each shipment in accordance with test reports.
a. Cement
Immediately upon receipt at the Site, the cement shall be stored separately in a dry
weather-tight, properly stocked in ventilated structure with adequate provision for
prevention of absorption of moisture. Cement in bags shall not be stacked more than 13
bags high.
The cement exposed to moisture or stored in bags for more than 3 months shall not be used
unless proven by test to be in good condition.
b. Aggregates
Aggregates shall be stored to assure good drainage to preclude inclusion of foreign matter
and to preserve the gradation. Each type and size of coarse aggregates shall be stored
separately in a layer not exceeding four (4) m in the thickness.
c. Reinforcement
All reinforcements shall be stored separately for each grade and diameter, off the ground in
a shed or under a suitable rain-proof cover.
2E Sheet 7 of 18
7. FORMWORK
a. Forms
Forms shall be designed, constructed and maintained so as to insure that, after removal of
forms, the finished concrete members will have true surfaces, free of offset without
waviness or bulges and will conform accurately to the indicated shapes, dimensions, lines,
elevations and positions.
Form surface that will be in contact with concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned before each
use.
b. Design
Studs and Wales shall be spaced to prevent deflection of form material. Forms and joints
shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage or grout and cement paste during placing of
concrete. Juncture of formwork panels shall occur at vertical control joints and
construction joints. Forms placed on successive units for continuous surfaces shall be
fitted in accurate alignment to assure smooth surfaces free from irregularities. Temporary
openings shall be arranged in wall to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Forms shall be
readily removable without impact, shock or damage to the concrete.
c. Form Ties
Form ties shall be factory-fabricated, removable or snap- off metal of design that will not
allow form deflection and will not spall concrete upon removal. Bolts and rods that are to
be completely withdrawn shall be coated with a not-staining bond breaker.
d. Chamfering
External corners that will be exposed shall be chamfered, bevelled or rounded by moldings
placed in the forms.
e. Coatings
Forms for exposed surfaces shall be coated with form oil or form-release agent before
reinforcement is placed. The coating shall be made in a manner that will not bond with
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatment of
concrete surface depending upon bond or adhesion nor impede the wetting of surfaces to
be cured with water or curing compounds. The coating shall be used as recommended in
the manufacturer's printed or written instructions. Forms for unexposed surfaces may be
wet with water in lieu of coating immediately before placing of concrete. Surplus coating
on form surfaces and coating on reinforcement steel and construction joints shall be
removed before placing concrete.
f. Removal
Removal of forms shall be in a manner to insure complete safety of the structure after the
following conditions have been met.
2E Sheet 8 of 18
1] Forms shall not be removed until the following minimum intervals of time have elapsed
commencing from the placing concrete, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
a] Beam side, wall and columns : 3 days
b] Slabs(props left under) : 3 days
c] Beam soffits (props left under) : 7 days
d] Props to slabs : 7 days
e] Props to beam : 16 days
f] Props to cantilevers : 20 days
g] When vertical forms are removed before 7 days after placing concrete,
appropriate curing measures shall be implemented immediately.
2] If the Contractor proposes to remove forms earlier that the period stated above, the
Contractor shall be required to submit the results of control tests showing evidence that
concrete has attained sufficient strength to permit removal of supporting forms.
Cylinders required for control tests shall be provided in addition to those otherwise
required by this Specification.
Test specimens shall be removed from molds at the end of 24 hours and stored in the
nearest site office as is practicable. The same protection shall be given to the elements
during curing as is given to those portions of the structure which they represent, and
shall not be removed from the site office for transmittal to the laboratory prior to
expiration of three-fourths of the proposed period before removal of forms. Cylinders
will be tested by and at the expense of the Contractor.
Supporting forms of shoring shall not be removed until control tests specimens have
attained strength of at least 160 kg/sq.cm. The newly unsupported portions of the
structure shall not be subjected to heavy material loading.
3] When forms are not be used, they shall be protected against damage and the effect of
weather. Care shall be taken by the Contractor that when re-using, form surfaces shall
be smooth and clean, and free from warping, twisting or other deformations. Any forms
which have, in opinion of the Engineer, deteriorated sufficiently to render it unsuitable
for the work shall be rejected and wasted.
8. REINFORCEMENT
a. Reinforcement shall be fabricated to shapes and dimensions shown on the Drawings, and
shall be placed as indicated. Reinforcement shall be free of loose or flaky rust and mill
scale or coating and any other substance that would reduce or destroy the bond.
Reinforcing steel reduced in section shall not be used. After any substantial delay in the
work, previously placed reinforcing steel for future bonding shall be inspected and
cleaned. Reinforcing steel shall not be bent or straightened in a manner injurious to the
steel or concrete during transportation to the site by ship or truck as well as during
fabrication at the work yard. Bars with kinks or bends not shown on the Drawings shall not
be placed. The use of heat to bend or straighten reinforcing steel shall not be permitted.
Bars shall be moved as necessary to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel,
2E Sheet 9 of 18
conduits, or embedded items. If bars are moved more than one bar diameter, the resulting
arrangement of bars including additional bars necessary to meet structural requirements
shall be approved before concrete is placed. In slabs, beams and girders, reinforcing steel
shall not be spliced at points of maximum stress unless otherwise permitted by the
Engineer. Laps or splices shall be as follows unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
1] Deformed bars in tension : 30 times the diameter
2] Deformed bars in compression : 25 times the diameter
3] Other details of reinforcement shall conform to ACI 318 or equivalent.
b. Welding of reinforcing bars shall only be permitted under the Engineer's approval. All
welding shall be performed in accordance with AWS D.12.1
c. Exposed reinforcing bars, inserts and plates shall be protected from corrosion.
d. Supports shall be provided in conformity with ACI 315 and ACI 318, or equivalent, unless
otherwise indicated or specified.
e. The minimum concrete cover of reinforcement shall be 5 cm however, shall be 8 cm or

more, where the concrete is directly washed or splashed by seawater, unless otherwise
shown on the Drawings or permitted by the Engineer.
9. CLASSES OF CONCRETE AND USAGE
Concrete of various classes indicated and as required under other sections shall be
proportioned and mixed for the following strength.
a. Concrete classes and strength
The characteristic of concrete are as follow.
________________________________________________________________________
Class Standard design strength (ck) Allowable bending stress (ca)
Compressive (kg/cm2) (kg/cm2)
________________________________________________________________________
A 300 100
A1 225 75
B 225 75
C 175 60
______________________________________________________________________
2E Sheet 10 of 18
b. Mixture.
1] Normal max. size of aggregates shall be as follows.
____________________________
Class Max. size (mm)
____________________________
A 20
A1 40
B 20
C 20
_____________________________
2] In addition to the above, the maximum permissible water-cement ratio by weight shall
not be greater than 0.50 for wharf and trestle, and 0.55 for other structure.
c. Usage
Concrete of the various classes shall be used as follows.
1] Class A : For reinforced concrete for wharf and trestle
2] Class A1: For mass concrete applied for modified concrete cube as armour layer for
Maritaing Port.
3] Class B : For reinforced concrete for building structure, retaining wall, drainage ditch,
paving block and pavement concrete.
4] Class C : For lean concrete
10. PROPORTIONING OF CONCRETE MIXES
a. Trial design batches and testing to meet requirements of each class of concrete specified
above shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The design mix shall be of
consistencies specified hereinafter in clause f. Test for slump, unit weight and air content
shall be performed in the field under the supervision of the Engineer.
b. Entrained Air Content
Air entrainment shall be produced by adding an air- entraining agent at the mixer. Air
content in concrete by volume shall be maintained at 3 to 5 percent as determined by
ASTM C 231 or equivalent.
c. Concrete Proportioning
2E Sheet 11 of 18
Samples of approved aggregates shall be obtained in accordance with the requirements of
ASTM D 75 or equivalent. Samples of materials other than aggregates shall be
accompanied by the manufacturer's test reports indicating compliance with applicable
specified requirements. Trial mixes having proportions, consistencies and air content
suitable for the work shall be made based on ACI Standard 211.1 using at least three
different water-cement ratios which will produce the strength required for the work.
Cement portion shall be used not less than 400 kg for 1 m3 of reinforced concrete.
Trial mix shall be designed including for maximum permitted slump and air content. The
temperature of concrete in each trial batch shall be reported to the Engineer. For each
water-cement ratio, at least three test cylinders for each test age shall be made and cured in
accordance with ASTM C 39 or equivalent. From these test results, a curve shall be plotted
showing the relationship between water-cement ratio and strength.
d. Average Strength
For each portion of the structure, proportions shall be selected so that the maximum
permitted water-cement ratio is not exceeded and so as to produce an average strength to
exceed the specified strength (fc') by the amount indicated below. Where production
facility has a standard deviation record determined in accordance with ACI 214, based on
30 consecutive strength tests of similar mixture proportions as proposed, it shall be used in
selecting average strength.
The average strength used as the basis for selecting proportions shall exceed the specified
strength (fc') by at least :
1] 30 kg/sq.cm if standard deviation is less than 20 kg/sq.cm
2] 40 kg/sq.cm if standard deviation is 20 to 30 kg/sq.cm
5] If the standard deviation exceeds 50 kg/sq.cm or if a standard deviation record is not

available, proportions shall be selected to produce an average strength at least 70
kg/sq.cm greather than the specified strength.
e. Corrective additions to remedy deficiencies in aggregate gradations shall be used only on

written approval of the Engineer.
f. Slump
Tests shall be made in conformance with ASTM C 143, and unless otherwise specified by
the Engineer, slump shall be within the following limits
Structural elements Slump for vibrated concrete
All other concrete 7 - 12 cm
Filling and leveling concrete max. 20 cm
g. Concrete Mixers
2E Sheet 12 of 18
Concrete mixer shall be powered mixers or portable mixer of sufficient capacity to satisfy
concrete placement requirements. Proposal of the mixer to be utilized for the work shall be
submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer for approval.
12. JOINTS
a] No reinforcement, corner protection angles or other fixed metal items shall be run
continuous through joints containing expansion-joint filter, through crack-control joints in
slabs on grade or through joints between slabs on grade and vertical surfaces.
b] Construction Joints
1] Construction joint shall be made between wharf and trestle and shall be provided
perpendicular to the axis of the member.
2] Precautions shall be taken to prevent loss of grout at the construction joint. Wherever
possible, top ends for construction joint shall be removed as soon as the concrete has
set and the surface shall be brushed and washed to remove the alliance and expose the
aggregate. The face of the existing concrete shall be well cleaned before receiving the
concrete to be bonded and the new concrete well consolidated against it.
3] Construction joint in exposed concrete surfaces shall be positioned and formed to

give minimum variation from the specified finishing.
13. PLACING CONCRETE
a. Preparation
Hardened concrete, debris and foreign materials shall be removed from interior of forms
and from inner surfaces of mixing and conveying equipment. Reinforcement shall be
secured in position and shall be inspected and approved before placing concrete. Runways
shall be provided for wheeled concrete-handling equipment. Such equipment shall not be
wheeled over reinforcement nor shall runways be supported on reinforcement. When
placing concrete on excavated ground surfaces, lean concrete shall be placed prior to
placing structural concrete. The ground surfaces shall be clean, free from mud and water as
specified in SECTION 2C, EARTH WORK. Where the direct placing concrete on the
excavated ground surfaces is allowed, waterproof paper or polyethylene sheeting of
nominal 0.4 mm thickness shall be laid over dry or previous surfaces receiving concrete,
thoroughly moisted but not muddy at the time of placing concrete.
b. Placing Concrete
Concrete shall be handled from mixer to place of final deposite in a continuous manner, as
rapidly as practicable and without segregation or loss of ingredient, until the approved unit
of work is completed. Placing will not be permitted when the sun, heat, wind or limitations
of facilities furnished by the Contractor prevent proper finishing and curing of the
concrete. Concrete shall be placed in the forms, as close as possible in final position, in
uniform approximately horizontal layers not over 30 cm deep.
Forms splashed with concrete and reinforcement splashed with concrete or form coating
shall be cleaned in advance of placing subsequent lifts. Concrete shall not be allowed to
drop freely more than 1.5 m in unexposed work nor more than 1.0 m in exposed work.
2E Sheet 13 of 18
Where greater drops are required, a tremie or other approved means shall be employed.
The discharge of the tremies shall be controlled so that the concrete may be effectively
compacted into horizontal layers not more than 30 cm thick, and the spacing of the tremies
shall be such that segregation does not occur. Concrete to receive other construction shall
be screened to the proper level to avoid excessive shimming or grouting. Conduits and
pipes shall not be embedded in concrete unless specifically permitted by the Engineer.
c. Time Interval between Mixing and Placing
Concrete mixed in stationary mixers and transported by non-agitating equipment shall be

placed in the forms within 30 minutes from the time ingredients are charged into the
mixing drum. Concrete transported in truck mixers or truck agitators shall be delivered to
the site and discharged in the forms within 45 minutes from the ingredients are discharged
into the mixing drum. Concrete shall be placed in the forms within 15 minutes after
discharge from the mixer at the site.
d. Hot Weather Requirements
Temperature of concrete during the period of mixing, transportation and/or placing shall
not be permitted to rise above 33C. Any batch of concrete which has reached a
temperature greater than 33C at and time in the aforesaid period shall not be placed but
shall be rejected, and shall not thereafter be used in any part of the permanent works.
1] Control Procedures
The Contractor shall provide water cooler facilities and procedures to control or
reduce the temperature of cement, aggregates and mixing/handling equipment to such
temperature that, at all time during mixing, transporting, handling and placing, the
temperature of the concrete shall not be greater than 33C.
2] Cold Joints and Shrinkage
Where cold joints tend to form or where surfaces set and dry too rapidly or plastic
shrinkage cracks tend to appear, concrete shall be kept moist by fog sprays or other
approved means, applied shortly after placement, and before finishing.
3] Supplementary Precautions
When the afore-mentioned precautions are not sufficient to satisfy the requirements
herein above, they shall be supplemented by restricting work to evening or night.
Procedure conform to ACI 305 or equivalent.
e. Conveying Concrete by Chute, Conveyor or Pump
Concrete may be conveyed by chute, conveyor or pump if approved by the Engineer in

writing. In requesting approval, the Contractor shall submit his entire plan of operation
from time of discharge of concrete from the mixer to final placement in the forms, and the
steps to be taken to prevent the formation of cold joints in case the transporting of
concrete by chute, conveyor or pump is disturbed. Conveyors and pumps shall be capable
of expeditiously placing concrete at the rate most advantageous to good workmanship.
Approval will not be given for chutes or conveyors requiring changes in the concrete
materials or design mix for efficient operation.
2E Sheet 14 of 18
1] Chutes and Conveyors
Chutes shall be of steel or steel-lined wood, rounded in cross section, rigid in

construction and protected from overflow. Conveyors shall be designed and operated
and chute sections shall be set to assure a uniform flow of concrete from mixer to
final place of deposit without segregation of ingredients, loss of mortar, or change in
slump. The discharge portion of each chute or conveyor shall be provided with a
device to prevent segregation. The chute and conveyor shall be thoroughly cleaned
before and after each run. Waste material and flushing water shall be discharged
outside the forms.
2] Pumps
Pumps shall be operated and maintained so that a continuous stream of concrete is

delivered into the forms without air pockets, segregation or change in slump. When
pumping is completed, concrete remaining in the pipeline shall be ejected and wasted
without contamination of concrete already placed. After each operation, equipment
shall be thoroughly cleaned and flushing water shall be wasted outside the forms.
14. COMPACTION
a. Concrete shall be vibrated and compacted in its positions carefully and thoroughly during
placing to ensure that the concrete completely surrounds the reinforcement, fills the forms
and excludes voids, and shall not be subsequently disturbed.
b. All concrete shall be vibrated and compacted by using internal vibrators of the size, type
and numbers approved by the Engineer. Vibrator shall be executed for the minimum time
period necessary for thorough consolidation of concrete. Excessive vibration leading to
segregation shall be avoided. Vibrators shall not be used to move concrete in the
formwork.
c. Immediately after placing, each layer of concrete shall be compacted by internal concrete
vibrators supplemented by hand-spanding, rodding and tamping. Tapping or other external
vibration of forms will not be permitted unless specifically approved by the Engineer.
Internal vibrator submerged in concrete shall maintain a speed of not less than 7,000
impulses per minute. The vibrator shall not be inserted into lower courses that have begun
to set. The vibrator shall be applied at uniformly spaced points not further apart than the
visible effectiveness of the machine.
15. BONDING
Before depositing new concrete on or against concrete that has been set, the surfaces of the
set concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned so as to expose the coarse aggregate and be free of
laitance, coatings, foreign matter and loose particles. Forms shall be retightened. The cleaned
surfaces shall be moist, but shall be without free water when concrete is placed.
16. SETTING OF BASE PLATES
2E Sheet 15 of 18
a. Preparation
After being plumbed and properly positioned, base plates shall be provided with full
bearing with damp-pack bedding mortar. The space between the top of concrete and the
bottom of the plate shall not be less than 13 mm for plates less than 30 cm wide. Concrete
surfaces shall be rough, clean, free of oil, grease and laitance and shall be dump. Metal
surfaces shall be clean and free of oil, grease and rust.
b. Mortar
Damp-pack bedding mortar shall consist of one part Portland cement and 2.5 parts of fine
aggregate, suitable to the work required, proportioned by weight and not more than 17
litters of water per bag of cement. The space between the top of the concrete and the
bottom of the plate shall be packed with the bedding mortar by tamping or ramming with a
bar or rod until the voids are completely filled.
17. FINISHES OF CONCRETE
a. Within 12 hours after forms are removed, surface defects shall be remedied as specified
herein. Temperature of the concrete, ambient air and mortar during remedial work
including curing shall be above 10C. Fine and loose material shall be removed.
Honeycomb, aggregate pockets, voids over 13 mm in diameter and holes left by the bolts
or rods shall be cut out to solid concrete, reamed, thoroughly wetted, brush-coated with
neat cement grout and filled with mortar. Mortar shall be a stiff mix of one (1) part
Portland cement to not more than 2 parts fine aggregate passing the No. 16 mesh sieve,
and minimum amount of water. The color of the mortar shall match the adjoining concrete
color. Mortar shall be thoroughly compacted in place. Holes passing entirely through walls
shall be completely filled from the inside face by forcing mortar through to the outside
face. Holes which do not pass entirely through the wall shall be packed full. Patchwork
shall finish flush and in the same plane as adjacent surfaces. Exposed patchwork shall be
finished to match adjoining surfaces in texture and color.
Patchwork shall be damp-cured for 72 hours. Ambient temperature shall be not less than
10C. Dusting of finish surfaces with dry material or adding water to concrete surfaces
will not be permitted.
b. Smooth Finish
Smooth finish shall be required only where specified to screed concrete and float to
required level with no coarse aggregate visible. After surface moisture has disappeared and
laitance has been removed, the surface shall be finished by float and steel trowel.
c. Broom Finish
The concrete shall be screened and floated to the required finish level with no coarse
aggregate visible. After the surface moisture has disappeared and laitance has been
removed, surface shall be float finished to and even and smooth finish. The floated surface
shall be brooded with a fiber bristle brush.
d. Tolerance
2E Sheet 16 of 18
Smooth and broom finished surfaces shall be true to plane with no deviation in excess of 3
mm in any direction when tested with a 3 m straight edge.
18. CURING
a. Concrete shall protected against moisture loss, rapid temperature change and mechanical
injury from taint or flowing water for a minimum period of 7 days for the concrete using
ASTM C 150 Type II or equivalent.
b. Concrete shall be maintained in a moist condition at temperature above 10C throughout

the specified curing period and until remedial work is started in clause 17, FINISHES OF
CONCRETE. Curing activities shall be started as soon as free water has disappeared from
the surface of the concrete after placing and finishing. Formed under surface shall be moist
cured with forms in place for the full curing period or, it forms are removed prior to the
end of the curing period, by other approved means. Curing shall be accomplished by any
of the following methods or combination thereof, as approved.
c. Moist Curing
Unformed surfaces shall be covered with burlap or mats, wetted before placing and
overlapped at least 15 cm. Burlap or mats shall be kept continually wet and in intimate
contact with the surface. Where formed surfaces are cured in the forms, the forms shall be
kept continually wet. If the forms are removed before the end of the curing period, curing
shall be continued as on unformed surfaces, using suitable materials. Burlap shall be used
only on surfaces that will be unexposed in the finished work and shall be in two layers.
d. Impervious-sheet Curing
All surfaces shall be thoroughly wetted with a fine spray of water and be completely
covered with water proof paper, polyethylene sheeting or polyethylene-coated burlap
having the burlap thoroughly water-saturated before placing. Covering shall be laid with
light-colored side up. Covering shall be lapped not less than 30 cm and securely weighted
down or shall be lapped not less than 10 cm and taped to form a continuous cover with
completely closed joints. Sheets shall be weighted to prevent displacement or billowing
from winds. Covering shall be folded down over exposed edges and secured by approved
means. Sheets shall be immediately repaired or replaced if tears or holes appear during the
curing period.
e. Membrane-forming Compound Curing
Before applying curing compound, tops of joints that are to receive sealant shall be tightly
closed with temporary material to prevent entry of the compound and to prevent moisture
loss during the curing period. The compound shall be applied on damp surfaces as soon as
the moisture film has disappeared. The curing compound shall be applied by power
spraying using a spray nozzle equipped with a wind guard. The compound shall be applied
in a two-coat, continuous operation at a coverage of not more than 10 sq.m/litre for each
coat. When application is made by hand sprayers, the second coat shall be applied in a
direction approximately at right angles to the direction of the first coat. The compound
shall form a uniform, continuous, adherent film that shall not check, crack or peel, and
shall be free from pinholes or other imperfections. Surfaces subjected to rainfall within 3
hours after compound has been applied, or surfaces damaged by subsequent construction
operations within the curing period, shall be immediately resprayed at the rate specified
2E Sheet 17 of 18
above. Membrane curing compound shall not be used on surfaces that are to receive any
subsequent treatment that depends on adhesion or bonding to the concrete. Membrane
curing compound shall not be used on surfaces that are maintained at curing temperatures
with free steam. Where membrane-forming curing compounds are permitted, permanently
exposed surfaces shall be cured by use of non-pigmented membrane-forming curing
compound containing a fugitive dye. Where non-pigmented type curing compounds are
used, the concrete surfaces shall be shaded from the direct rays of the sun for the curing
period. Surface coated with curing compound shall be kept free of foot and vehicular
traffic and from other sources of abrasion and contamination during the curing period.
2E Sheet 18 of 18
SECTION 2G
METAL WORKS
1. SCOPE
a. This section include all miscellaneous metal works and related work required under
the Contract.
b. Reference
SECTION 2L, FINISHES
2. GENERALS
a. Location and dimension of metal works required to construct various structures of the
works shall be as shown on the Drawings. The Contractors, however, shall verify all
measurements and shall take all field measurements necessary to complete the work
before fabrication.
b. The Contractor shall be responsible for any errors of detailing fabrication.
c. The following publications listed below, but referred to thereafter by basic

designation only, form a part of this Specification to the extent indicated by the
references thereto.
1) JIS Publications
JIS B 1180 Hexagon Head Bolts
JIS B 1181 Hexagon Nuts
JIS G 3101 Rolled Steel for General Structure
JIS G 3106 Rolled Steel for Welded Structure
JIS G 3192 Dimensions, Weight and Permissible Variations of Hot Rolled

Steel Sections
JIS G 3193 Dimensions, Weight and Permissible Variations of Hot Rolled

Steel Plates, Sheets and Strip
JIS G 3444 Carbon Steel Tubes for General Structural Purposes
JIS G 3452 Carbon Steel Pipes for Ordinary Piping
JIS H 8641 Zink Coating (Hot-dipped) on Iron or Steel
JIS K 6380 Industrial Rubber Packing Material
2G Sheet 1 of 4
2) ASTM Publication
A 120 Black and Hot Dipped Zinc-coated (Galvanized) Welded and

Seamless Steel Pipe for Ordinary Uses
A 123 Zinc (Hot-galvanized) Coating on Products Fabricated from

Rolled, Pressed and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strip
A 153 Zinc Coating (Hot-dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
A 386 Zinc Coating (Hot-dip) on Assembled Steel Products
3) AWS Publication
D1.1 Structural Welding Code
4) SII Publications
3. SUBMITTALS
a. Refer to SECTION 1H, SUBMITTALS.
b. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings of all metal works to the Engineer for
approval prior to commencement of the work. These shop drawings shall show full
details of the followings.
1) Welds, both shop and field, by welding symbols of AWS, JIS or equivalent
2) Templates and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other devices
c. Welding Procedure
The Contractor shall submit for the Engineer's approval the written description of
non-praqualified welding procedures including types of welding studs and arc shields.
d. Field Welding Equipment
Detailed data of welding equipment including type, voltage and amperage shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval.
3. MATERIALS
a. General
Material shall conform to the requirements specified for the particular item and where
these requirements are not specified in detail, materials shall be suitable for the
intended usage of the item. The materials listed below shall conform to the respective
specifications and other requirements as designated below.
1) Steel plates, shapes and bars shall conform to the requirements of JIS G 3101 (SS
41), G 3192 and G 3193 or ASTM A 36, or equivalent.
2G Sheet 2 of 4
2) Bolts, nuts and washers shall conform to the requirements of JIS G 3101 (SS 41),
B 1180, B 1186 (F 11T) or ASTM A 307 (Grade A), or equivalent and shall be
galvanized in accordance with JIS H 8641 or equivalent.
3) Steel pipe shall conform to the requirements of JIS G 3452 (SGP), G 3444 (STK
41) or equivalent.
4) Steel grating shall conform to the requirements of JIS G 3101 (SS 41) or
equivalent and shall be galvanized in accordance with JIS H 8641 or equivalent.
5) High strength bolts and accessories where indicated shall conform to JIS B 1186
(F 11T) or equivalent.
b. Delivery
Anchor bolts and other anchorage devices which are to be embedded in concrete shall
be delivered to the site in time to be installed during the approved construction
program.
5. WELDING
a. All welding work shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of AWS
D1.1 or approved equal. The Contractor shall develop procedures for welding all
metals included in the work. Welding shall not be started until welding procedures,
welders, welding operators and tuckers have been qualified as specified herein.
Qualification testing shall be performed by an approved testing laboratory or by the
Contractor subject to the approval of the Engineer. Cost of such testing shall be borne
by the Contractor.
b. Welding Procedure Qualification
Qualification of welding procedure shall be in accordance with the requirements of

AWS D1.1 The Contractor shall submit 2 copies of the welding procedure
qualification and the results for each type of welding to be performed to the Engineer
for approval.
c. Welder, Welding Operator and Tacker Qualification
Each welder, welding operator and tacker assigned to the work shall be qualified by
tests using equipment, positions, procedures, base metal and electrodes that will be
encountered in his assignment. Certification that each welder, welding operator and
tacker is qualified in accordance with the requirements of AWS D1.1 or approved
equal shall be furnished to the Engineer for approval.
d. Welding Material
Only welding equipment, electrodes, welding wire and fluxes capable of producing
satisfactory welds shall be employed when used by a qualified welder or welding
operator using qualified welding procedures. Welding metals shall conform to AWS
D1.1 and followings.
2G Sheet 3 of 4
1) Shiel metal-arc welding : AWS A 5.1 or A 5.5
2) AWS A 5.18 and article 417 of AWS Building Code
3) Flux cored arc welding : AWS A 5.2 and article 418 of AWS Building Code
e. Welded portions shall be checked by visual inspection. If some doubts are found on
the welded portions, the contractor shall perform the color checking (Dye Pnenetrant)
on the such parts. If the portions are not properly welded, or any defects are found,
the portion shall be repaired, and remained 20% welded portions against total welding
locations (one of 5 welding portions) shall be checked by color checking. In any
case, checking cost shall be considered to be included in the unit rates of Bill of
Quantities.
6. GALVANIZING AND PRIMING
a. Galvanizing, where required, shall conform to the requirements of JIS H 8641 or

ASTM A 123, A 153 and A 386 or equivalent. The weight of the zinc coating shall be
not less than 550 g/sq.m of coated surface, unless otherwise specified.
b. All galvanized steel in contact with preservative treated wood or concrete shall be
coated with a bituminous paint on the contact surfaces.
c. Prime painting where called for shall be prime painted in the shop after fabrication.
However, steel surface to be embedded in concrete and surface to be field welded
shall be omitted from priming. Preparation of surface, prime paint and workmanship
shall comply with SECTION 2L, FINISHES.
7. PAINTING
a. All structural steel, except surfaces of steel to be embedded in concrete and surfaces
to be field welded, shall be painted in the shop in accordance with the applicable
requirements of SECTION 2L, FINISHES.
b. After completion of field welding, welded portions shall be coated in accordance with
the requirements of SECTION 2L, FINISHES.
1) Prior to coating, damaged primers, coating and other foreign materials shall be
removed perfectly and the new primers and coating shall be applied.
2) Completed coating shall be tested by an approved method by the Contractor in

the presence of the Engineer.
2G Sheet 4 of 4
SECTION 2H
PAVEMENT
1. SCOPE
a. This Section includes pavement work for road, parking area, open storage area and related
work required under the Contract.
b. References
SECTION 2A, RECLAMATION
2. GENERAL
a. Setting Out
The Contractor shall properly set out the positions of various surfaces and structures and
establish bench marks to indicate the levels of surface, all as necessary and approved by the
Engineer. Such setting out and bench marks shall be effectively protected until the
pertinent works are completed in a manner to be approved by the Engineer.
b. Earth Work
Prior to the commencement of the pavement work, area to be paved shall be excavated,
graded and compacted to the depth and compaction required for paving in accordance with
the requirements of SECTION 2C, EARTH WORK.
c. The following publications listed below, but referred to thereafter by basic designation
only, form a part of this Specification to the extent indicated by the references thereto.
1) ASTM Publications
D 693 Crushed Stone, Crushed Slag and Crushed Gravel for Bituminous Macadam
Base and Surface Course of Pavements.
2) AASHTO Publications
T 180 Moisture-density Relations of Soil Using a 10 lb. Rammer on a 18 in. Drop
T 193 The California Bearing Ratio
d. The Contractor shall ensure the stability and uniformity of the pavement which is to be
constructed on the newly reclaimed area, which has been made by the Contractor. In this
relation, the Contractor shall remedy the pavement at the end of the maintenance period, if
2H Sheet 1 of 3
the result of the measurement shows non-compliance with in the required tolerances, under
the Contractor's responsibility to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3. GENERAL PROFILE OF PAVEMENT
General profiles of typical section is as follows:
- Base couse
- Concrete pavement
4. MATERIALS
a. A sample of each material described herein shall be submitted and shall be approved by the
Engineer prior to application of material in the work.
b. Material for base course shall consist of well graded crushed stone having size from 0.005
mm to 25 mm.
c. The fine aggregate for concrete shall be of pit sand and the course aggregate shall be of
crushed durable stone or gravel of 20 mm maximum size, both approved by the Engineer.
All aggregates shall be clean, free from chalk, organic matters, or other harmful matters to the
concrete in conformance to the requirements of NI-2.
5. SUB-GRADE
a. The existing or reclaimed ground surfaces where the pavement is to be placed shall be filled
or excavated, trimmed, shaped and compacted to the levels and compactions required herein.
b. If the existing or reclaimed soils fail to satisfy the required compaction, or the Engineer
judges such soils not suitable for sub-grade, the Contractor shall replace, at his cost, such
soils by suitable materials to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
c. If any settlement of the sub-grade has occurred prior to the commencement of pavement
work, the Contractor shall rework sub-grade to conform to the specified level and
compaction at his own expense and obtain the Engineer's approval.
d. Sub-grade shall be compacted to modified CBR value of 3 to 8, and tolerance of formation

level shall be within + 50 mm.
6. BASE COURSE
a. Immediately following final spreading and smoothing, base course shall be compacted and
watered to the designated surface levels by means of equipment approved by the Engineer.
Rolling shall progress gradually from the one side to the other, and shall continue until all
the designated surfaces have been rolled to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Any irregularities
or depressions developed shall be corrected by adding or removing material until the surface
is smooth and uniform. The material shall be bladed and rolled until a smooth and even
surface has been obtained.
2H Sheet 2 of 3
b. Base course shall be compacted to produce the minimum modified CBR value of 80
determined in accordance with AASHTO T 180, method D. Field CBR test shall be done
every 1,000 sq.m at each course by the Contractor.
c. The tolerance of formation levels for base course shall be within + 10 mm.
The Contractor shall submit his proposal of design mix for the Engineer’s approval, including
course aggregates, fine aggregate, filter, bitumen and whatsoever.
The Contractor shall also demonstrate at the site suitability of the proposed design mix and
the laying methods.
7. CONCRETE PAVEMENT
a. Class of concrete to be used for pavement shall be class “B” as specified in SECTION 2E,
CONCRETE.
b. Reinforcement shall be of sizes, shapes and spacing as shown on the Drawings or approved
shop drawings.
c. Concrete shall be mixed, handled, conveyed, placed and finished in strict conformance with
the applicable requirements of SECTION 2E, CONCRETE.
d. The Contractor shall submit the detailed plan and schedule of concrete work including
location of construction joint, to the Engineer for approval, before commencing the work.
8. TEST
The Contractor shall carry out the following tests under the requirements of ASTM D 693 or other
approved standards or as directed by the Engineer and shall submit the report thereof in 5
copies within 1 (one) week of the completion of the respective tests.
2H Sheet 3 of 3
SECTION 2I
DRAINAGE
1. SCOPE
a. This Section includes materials and construction of concrete ditch, culvert and gutter for the
drainage alongside the road way and building, and related work required under the Contract.
b. Reference
SECTION 2H, PAVEMENT
2. GENERAL
a. Locations and types of the drainage system shall be as shown on the Drawings.
b. The Contractor shall submit the shop drawings showing full details of the work method such
as setting out, excavation, placing concrete or prefabricated units, backfilling, or others as
necessary, to the Engineer for approval prior to the commencement of the work.
c. Shor drawings shall also include the detailed plan and construction method for connection of
drainage system to the existing drainage system.
3. EARTH WORK
a. Excavation and backfilling for the work shall be carried out to the required formation as
shown on the Drawings in accordance with the requirements of SECTION 2C, EARTH
WORK.
b. Excavation ground surfaces shall be compacted, graded, trimmed and levelled to the required
formations shown on the Drawings prior to receiving the sub-sequent works.
c. Approved means for shuttering and dewatering for carrying out the work in dry condition
shall be provided by the Contractor in accordance with the requirements of SECTION 2C,
EARTH WORK.
4. STONES
a. Stones for foundation of drainage structures shall be supplied, placed and compacted to the
width and thickness as shown on the Drawings.
2I Sheet 1 of 2
b. Stones shall conform to the following requirements.
1] Crushed stone
The Contractor shall submit samples of each type of stones to the Engineer for approval.
c. Tolerances of stones placed at the site shall be within + 10 mm against the elevations shown
on the Drawings.
5. LEAN CONCRETE
a. Lean concrete shall be placed and levelled on the prepared surfaces of the stone foundation.
b. The requirements for materials and placing of lean concrete shall be in accordance with
SECTION 3A, CONCRETE.
6. DITCH, CULVERT AND GUTTER
a. Drainage structures such as ditches, culverts and gutters shown on the Drawings may be of in-
place concrete or precast concrete units either at the Contractor’s work yard or at factory. The
Contractor shall submit his proposal of such work method for which the Contractor intends to
apply, to the Engineer for approval. In any case, concrete structures such as ditches, culverts
and gutters shall conform to the requirements of SECTION 2E, CONCRETE.
b. The bottom level of drainage structures shall be finished as uniformly as possible to ensure no
standing water in the drainage, or as directed by the Engineer.
7. PIT AND MANHOLE
a. Excavation and backfilling, and concrete work for manhole and pit shall comply with the
requirements in SECTION 2C, EARTH WORK and SECTION 2E, CONCRETE
respectively.
b. Connection with ditch, gutter or the like comming in thereto or going out there from shall be
properly treated, and voids well filled and sealed to the satisfaction of the Engineer to prevent
any leakage of water therefrom.
c. The Contractor may have option to construct these pits and manholes by cast-in-place or
precast concrete subject to the approval of the Engineer.
2I Sheet 2 of 2
SECTION 2 J
FENDER SYSTEM
1. SCOPE
This Section includes fender system for each berth and related works required under the
Contract.
2. GENERAL
a. Rubber fender shall be applied for fender system of each berth.
b. The following publications listed below, but referred to thereafter by basic designation only,
form a part of this Specification to the extent indicated by the references thereto.
JIS Publications
JIS G 3101 Rolled Steel for General Structures
JIS G 4303 & G 4315 Stainless Steel Bars
JIS K 6250 Vulcanized Rubber
c. The manufacture of rubber fender shall be approved by the Engineer in advance to the
selection of manufacture. The Contractor shall submit the document of company broacher
together with the past production list to certify the enough experience of the production for
the similar type of rubber fender specified hereunder.
d. The following specification listed below, should be followed by the contractor but referred
to thereafter by basic designation only, form a part of this Specification to the extent
indicated by the references thereto.
PKKI : Peraturan Konstruksi Kayu Indonesia NI-5 1971 Publications
3. SUBMITTALS
a. Refer to SECTION 1 H, SUBMITTALS
b. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings for wooden and rubber fender system showing
construction, mounting, erection methods and sequence of operation, catalogues for all kinds
of fenders to be employed for the works, and the reports and certificates as specified
hereunder.
2J Sheet 1 of 6
4. MATERIAL
a. Performance Characteristic of Rubber Fender
The rubber elements of the fender system for Jetty of PT. Soma Daya Utama port shall meet
the following requirements.
Energy Reaction
Port Type Dimension Absorption Force Anchor Bolt
(V-Shaped) (Minimum) (Maximum)
Jetty of PT. SDU 500 H x 3000 L 23.6 ton m 112.5 ton M - 36
Energy Reaction
Port Type Dimension Absorption Force Anchor Bolt
(Cell Type) (Minimum) (Maximum)
Jetty of PT. SDU 1000 H 15.6 ton m 35.6 ton M - 36
Note: Energy absorptions and reaction forces in the above table shall be at the rated
deflection of 52.5% against total height or similar. The quantity and shape of fender
shall be refered to the Drawings.
b. Performance Characteristic of Wooden Fender
The wooden elements of the fender system for Jetty of PT. Soma Daya Utama shall meet the
following requirements.
Port Type Dimension Energy Reaction Anchor Bolt

Absorption Force
(Minimum) (Maximum)
Jetty of PT. SDU - - - -
c1. Property and Material of each Component of Fender
1] Rubber buffer
Performance of rubber buffer
The performance of rubber buffer shall be measured in accordance with the test
requirements of Permanent International Association of Navigation Congresses
(P.I.A.N.C) Annex 4.1 of the Supplement to Bulletin No. 45 (1984).
Energy absorption : More than – 10% of Para. 4.a Performance Characteristics

at the rated deflection.
Reaction load : Less than + 10% of Para 4.a Performance Characteristics
at the rated deflection.
2J Sheet 2 of 6
Rubber Compound
The rubber compound is superior, especially in resistance to aging, seawater,

weathering and friction. Being reinforced with carbon black, it shows the excellent
physical properties as enumerated below.
- Tensile Strength
Test method : JIS K 6251/6257
Before aging : More than 160 kg/sq.cm
After aging : More than 80% of original value
Aging condition : 70o C x 96 hrs
- Elongation
Before aging : More than 350%
After aging : More than 80% of original value
- Hardness
Before aging : 72゜max.
After aging : Less than original value + 8゜
- Compression set : Less than 30%

Test method : JIS K 6262
Test condition : 70o C x 24 hrs
2] Anchor bolt
Anchor bolt and connecting hardware shall be fabricated confirming to :
Composition : Composed of anchor box with square washer, and fixing

bolt
Anchor bolt : Fixing bolt – Rolled steel (JIS G3101) Galvanized, or

equivalent
Washer – Rolled steel (JIS G3101) Galvanized, or
equivalent
Anchor box : SQ Flange – Rolled steel (JIS G3101) Galvanized, or

equivalent
Anchor plug – Stainless steel (JIS G4303 & G4315), or
equivalent
Anchor hook – Rolled steel (JIS G3101), or equivalent
2J Sheet 3 of 6
c2. Property and Material of each component of Wooden Fender
1] Wooden buffer
Performance of wooden buffer
The performance of wooden buffer shall be measured in accordance with the Peraturan
Konstruksi Kayu Indonesia (PKKI) NI 5-1971 Publications.
Wooden Compound
The wooden compound is, especially in resistance to aging, seawater, weathering and
friction. Class of wooden fender shall be Class I (one) wood for strength and physical
durability (ulin or besi or equivalent).
- Allowable Stresses
Bending Stess : σ flex = 170 kg/cm2
Compression stress//and tensile stress//
Tension : σ compression = 150 kg/cm2
Compression strength : σ comp = 40 kg/cm2
Shear strength :τ = 20 kg/cm2
Unit weight :δ = 10.4 k N/m3
Elastic Modulus :Е = 125,000 kg/cm2
Remarks :
- For structural parts unprotected against sun and rain, located above HWL, the
allowable stress mentioned above shall be deducted by three (3).
- Class and Grade

Quality grade : Wood grade A (Iron wood or Ulin wood)
2] Anchor bolt
Anchor bolt and connecting hardware shall be fabricated confirming to :
Composition : Composed of anchor box with square washer, and fixing

bolt.
Anchor bolt : Fixing bolt – Rolled steel (JIS G3101) Galvanized, or

equivalent
Washer - Rolled steel (JIS G3101) Galvanized, or
equivalent
Diameter of holes of anchor bolts shall be the similar diameter of anchor bolts, and top
of bolts shall not be projected from the surface of tenders. After installation of anchor
bolts, all holes shall be filled with asphalt.
2J Sheet 4 of 6
d. Report on Test/Inspection
The following test shall be conducted.
1] Rubber buffer
The test/inspection of rubber shall be done in accordance with Permanent International

Association of Navigation Congresses (P.I.A.N.C) Annex 4.1 of the Supplement to
Bulletin No. 45 (1984).
Dimension and Appearance

All rubber fenders shall be of the same dimensions and shapes as shown on the
drawings.
Performance of rubber buffer
The performance of rubber buffer sample shall be measured in accordance with the test
requirements of P.I.A.N.C. Annex 4.1 of the Supplement to Bulletin No. 45 (1984), and
checked with the specified values. One test per ten fenders of each item shall be
conducted.
One set of photo during performance test shall be taken and reported to the Engineer.
In addition to the above normal performance test, the fatigue test of rubber fender shall
be conducted to the same type, size, and compound of specified rubber fender upon
request by the Engineer. The test of fatigue shall be as follows:
-Height of fender : Actual size as specified in this specification

-Length of fender : 1 meter
-Number of cycle : 200 cycles
-Maximum deflection : 52.5% deflection against the height of fender
-Speed of compression : 80mm +/- 5mm per minute
-Ambient Temperature : 30deg +/- 3deg C
Fender material shall not have any crack or rapture and any serious permanent
deformation after this fatigue test. The material of this test shall not be used for this
project after this fatigue test.
The above performance test and fatigue test shall be conducted at the authorized
laboratory, which shall be approved by the Engineer and the test machine for this test
shall be calibrated, inspected and certified by the third inspection party.
The Engineer will inspect the above the performance test and the fatigue test, as the
witness, before the delivery from the manufacturer.
The minimum three fenders shall be tested, which consist of one type of fender per each
port.
The Contractor shall bear the traveling and accommodation cost to the test location in
case the location of test is out of Jakarta.
2J Sheet 5 of 6
Rubber Compound
The physical property of rubber compound shall be measured on the following test
items.
-Tensile Strength (Test method : JIS K 6251/6257)

- Elongation (Test method : JIS K 6251/6257)
- Hardness (Test method : JIS K 6253/6257)
- Compression (Test method : JIS K 6262)
The rubber material of the fender system shall be of products approved by the Engineer,
2] Steel Material
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer two copies of mill test reports certifying that
the materials meet the specified standards.
5. INSTALLATION
All Rubber Fender system shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions
and/or the approved shop drawings.
Wooden Fenders shall be installed in accordance with the Engineer’s instruction and the
approved shop drawing.
2J Sheet 6 of 6
SECTION 2 K
MOORING FACILITIES
1. SCOPE
a. This Section includes bitts and bollards for each berth, and related work required under the
Contract.
b. References
2. GENERAL
a. The following publications listed below, but referred to thereafter by basic designation only,
JIS Publications
JIS G 3101 Rolled Steel for General Structures
JIS G 5501 FC 20 Gray Iron Castings
b. Submittals
1) Refer to SECTION 1H, SUBMITTALS
2) The Contractor shall submit shop drawings and catalogues to the Engineer for approval
indicating size, weight and mounting requirements.
3) No equipment shall be ordered without prior approval of the Engineer.
3. MATERIALS
a. Bitts and Bollards
1) Bitts and bollards for each berth shall be of the dimensions, weights, capacities and
design as shown on the Drawings, and shall be fabricated with cast iron conforming to the
following the requirements or approved equal.
a) Body : JIS G 5101, grade 3, SC 46
b) Foundation : JIS G 3101, grade 2, SS 41 or JIS bolt B 0205, M64-6
c) Nut : JIS B 1181, grade 1, class 3, 4T, M64-6
2K Sheet 1 of 2
d) Washer : JIS B 1256, steel bars
e) Foundation : JIS G 3101, grade 2, SS 41 or JIS plate G 5101, grade 3, SC 46
2) Concrete used for the work shall be of class "B" conforming to the requirements of
SECTION 2E, CONCRETE.
b. Anchor bolts, bolts, nuts and washers shall be of the required sizes for the purpose intended
conforming to the requirements of above, and shall be galvanized.
c. Grout shall conform to the requirements of SECTION 2E, CONCRETE.
d. Galvanizing shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of SECTION 2G,

METAL WORK.
4. MILL TEST CERTIFICATES
Unless this requirement is waived in writing by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer 2 copies of mill test reports certifying that materials meet the specified standards.
5. TEST AND INSPECTION
a. Refer to SECTION 1G, TESTS AND INSPECTIONS.
b. Inspection of all materials and methods of fabrication shall be carried out by the Contractor.
However, the Engineer reserves the right to inspect all facilities at any time during the
manufacture to ensure that the materials and workmanship are in accordance with the
Specifications and the best shop practices.
6. INSTALLATION
All equipment shall be installed at the locations shown on the Drawings in accordance with the
approved manufacturer's recommendations and shop drawings, and as directed by the Engineer.
The color of equipment shall conform to the color-standard issued by the Employer.
2K Sheet 2 of 2
SECTION 2 L
FINISHES
1. SCOPE
This Section includes painting and related work required for metal work, or for others as
required, under the Contract.
2. GENERAL
a. All exposed metal surfaces, except metal surfaces embedded in concrete or

galvanized, shall be painted unless otherwise specified. All tools and equipment shall
be suitable for the work and be maintained in good order.
b. All painting works specified in this Section shall be carried out by well experienced
painters.
3. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
a. Paints for the protective coating system shall be products of a manufacturer approved
by the Engineer.
b. General Paint Schedule
1) Protective shop coating for exposed general metal structures shall be as follows.
a) Primer : 1 (one) coat of red-lead zinc chromate anti- corrosive paint, 75

microns, conforming to JIS K 5628 or approved equal.
b) Coating : 2 (two) coats of anti-corrosive paint for general use, 150 microns,
conforming to JIS K 5621 or approved equal, or 2 coats of marine paint of
approved quality for structures on and near the sea.
2) Protective shop coating for the pipelines and appurtenant works, except that for
galvanized pipes, shall be as follows.
a) Primer : 1 (one) coat of inorganic zinc, 75 microns, of approved quality.
b) Coating : 2 (two) coats of epoxy polyamide high build, 125 microns, of

approved quality.
3) Cement plastered wall and wood shall be painted with 1 (one) coat of linseed oil
and 2 coats of oil paint of approved quality, unless otherwise specified in other
section of the Specifications.
2L Sheet 1 of 5
c. Color of paint for various structures shall be as directed by Engineer.
d. Equipment
1) Paint Mixers
Mechanical mixers shall be employed for all paint mixing operations, except that
the Engineer may allow hand mixing of small quantities at his discretion.
2) Compressed air supply for blast cleaning and paint spraying shall be adequate in
pressure and volume.
4. DELIVERY AND STORAGE
a. Delivery
Delivery of all materials to the site shall be in the original labeled sealed cans and
containers with labels intact and seals unbroken.
1) Seals shall remain unbroken until inspection and acceptance of materials by the
Engineer.
2) Delivery of all materials shall be in ample quantities sufficiently in advance of the

need to avoid any delay or interruptions in the work.
b. Storage
Paint and thinner shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's printed
instructions.
1) All regulations required for storage of paint shall be observed, and all necessary
safety signs required by governing codes shall be posted.
2) Any damage caused by failure to exercise proper precautions in paint storage

shall be repaired.
3) All containers of paints shall remain unopened until required for use. Containers
which have been opened shall be used first, otherwise the oldest paint shall be
used first.
4) No paint material shall be used which has exceeded the manufacturer's

recommended shelf life.
5. QUALITY ASSURANCE
a. The paint manufacturer's instructions shall be observed at all times with particular
reference to storage, mixing, thinning application and the time interval between paint
coats.
2L Sheet 2 of 5
b. The Contractor shall ensure that his shop and site personnel are, at all times, available
for the Engineer as well copies of all above-mentioned standards and/or specifications
and the applicable manufacturer's instructions and data sheets.
6. SURFACE PREPARATION
a. Surface preparation and painting work shall be carried out in accordance with JIS or
other standards approved by the Engineer and as specified herein.
b. All round welds, burrs and sharp surface projection shall be ground smooth and all
weld splatter shall be removed prior to blast cleaning.
c. The grit size shall be 20 - 40 mesh Ottawa Flint Silica or equivalent. Grit or shot
blasting which obtain the desired profile and degree of cleaning are also acceptable.
d. Blast cleaning operations shall not be conducted on surfaces that will be wet after
blasting and before coating, or when the surfaces are less than 10C above dew
points, or when the relative humidity of the air is greater than 95%.
e. Any oil, grease, soils, dust or other foreign matter deposited on the cleaned surfaces
shall be removed prior to painting. In the event that rusting occurs after completion
of the surface preparation, the surfaces shall be cleaned again in accordance with the
specified method.
f. Particular care shall be taken to prevent the contamination of cleaned surfaces with
salt, acids, alkali or other corrosive chemicals before the application of the paint.
Such contamination shall be removed from the cleaned surface by flash blasting and
the paint applied immediately.
g. Care shall be taken to prevent contamination of cleaned and painted surfaces by

cleaning operations in an adjacent area.
h. Surfaces not included to be painted shall be suitably protected from the effects of
cleaning and painting operations.
7. MIXING AND THINNING
Mixing and thinning of paint shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer's printed
instructions. The pot life of each paint as stated by the manufacturer shall not be
exceeded.
8. WEATHER LIMITATION
The paint shall not be applied under the following weather conditions.
a. The relative humidity is above 85 percent.
2L Sheet 3 of 5
b. The wind velocity is above 5 m/sec or the velocity which causes any scatter of the
paint surface.
c. In rain, fog, dust or mist.
d. Any other conditions under which, in the opinion of the Engineer, make it inadvisable
to apply paint.
9. APPLICATION
a. Paint shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
b. The paint work crew shall be properly trained in the use of the paint materials
specified herein. Paint shall not be applied by personnel who are not familiar with the
paint and its application.
c. Each coat of paint shall be applied as a continuous film of uniform thickness free of
pores. Any thin spots or missed areas shall be repainted and permitted to dry before
the following coat of paint is applied.
d. During the application of the paint, care shall be taken to prevent all runs or sags.
Should they occur, they shall be brushed out. Paint shall be worked into all crevices
and corners.
e. If, during the application of the paint, there appears faulty paint in terms of color,
consistency, dry time of quality of finish, then the work shall be stopped by the
Contractor and the manufacturer shall be consulted by the Contractor. The
Contractor shall notify this matter to the Engineer in writing. The responsibility for
such action lies solely with the Contractor.
f. Areas where field welds are to be made shall not be painted within 15 cm of the edges
to be field welded.
g. After application of each coat, the dry film thickness shall be checked by means of a
micrometer or a magnetic thickness gauge or other suitable devices.
h. Paint that curls or lifts after application shall be removed and the area shall be cleaned
and repaired in accordance with this Specification.
10. TOUCH-UP PAINTING
a. Touch-up painting shall be done with the same paint as used for the original coat.
The resulting minimum dry film thickness shall be the same as for the original coat.
b. Touch-up paint shall include cleaning and painting of field connections, welds and all
damaged or defective paint and rusted areas.
2L Sheet 4 of 5
c. During touch-up painting, only close, cracked, brittle or non-adherent paint shall be
removed during cleaning.
All exposed edges shall be lightly brushed over. Touch- up painting shall be
performed in a manner which will minimize damage to sound paint. Rust sport shall
be thoroughly cleaned and edges of the existing paint shall be scraped back to sound
material.
11. DRYING
a. No primer or paint shall be force dried under conditions which will cause cracking,
wrinkling, blistering, formation of pores or detrimentally after the conditions of the
paint.
b. No drier shall be added to the paint unless specified in the manufacturer's printed
instructions.
c. Paint surfaces shall be protected from dust, dirt and the elements of the weather until
dry to the fullest extent practicable.
d. After drying, any areas of paint damaged from any cause shall be removed. The
surface shall be repaired and then repainted with the same paint to the same thickness
as the undamaged areas.
12. HANDLING
a. Paint which is damaged in handling shall be scraped off and touch-up with the same
paint and in the same thickness as was previously applied to the damaged area.
b. Precautions shall be taken to minimize damage to paint films resulting from stacking
for drying.
13. INSPECTION
a. All work and materials supplied under this Specification shall be subject to the
inspection by the Engineer.
b. The Contractor shall correct such work or replace such material as is found defective
under this Specification at his own expense.
14. COLOR
Color of all painting work shall follow the color standard, issued by the Employer or
otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Color for steel and/or concrete wheel guard both at trestle and wharf shall be intermittent
color, black and yellow, each length is 50 cm.
2L Sheet 5 of 5
SECTION 3A
CONCRETE
1. SCOPE
a. This Section sets forth the materials and workmanship for the concrete for building work, and
related works required under the Contract.
b. Other Section in the Specification listed below shall apply to this Section to the extent applicable
except unless otherwise specified hereunder.
SECTION 2D, PILING
2. GENERAL
a. Requirements for concrete work prescribed in this Section shall apply for the concrete work of
Civil Works SECTION 2E, CONCRETE to the extent applicable.
b. Submittal
1) Refer to SECTION 1H, SUBMITTALS.
2) The Contractor shall prepare and submit all the detailed calculation, bending schedules and
shop drawings necessary for the execution of the concrete work to the Engineer for approval.
3) As soon as practicable after signing of the Contract and before commencing the work at site,
the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a complete list of all items of
equipment and materials he proposes to use in the work, giving the name and address of the
manufacturer, trade names and full descriptions required to identify the item. Consideration
will not be given to partial lists submitted from time to time.
4) No order shall be placed by the Contractor for major materials or equipment unless written
approval of the Engineer has been obtained.
5) Where due to non availability of any materials or for any other reason, the Contractor desires
to substitute another brand or type of material for the one approved, the Contractor shall
submit his application to the Engineer accompanied with the followings.
a. Samples of the proposed materials with all necessary technical information

b. Detailed comparison of the properties of both items
c. Detailed price analysis of both items
d. Explicit reasons for desiring the change
3A Sheet 1 of 4
c. Confer with Other Related Works
Before commencing any concrete work, the Contractor shall confer with other related works to
ensure that all piping, conduits, drains, sleeves, bolts, hangers, fixing lugs, timber fillets or any
other materials necessary to be installed or embedded in the concrete have been fixed.
3. EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL
a. Aggregates
The fine aggregate shall be of pit sand and the coarse aggregate shall be of crushed durable stone
or gravel of 20 mm maximum size both approved by the Engineer. All aggregate shall be clean,
free from chalk, organic matters, or other harmful matters to the concrete in conformance to the
requirements of NI-2.
b. Anchorage Items
Slots and insert for anchoring masonry and mechanical items of concrete shall be of standard
products to and of types required to engage with the anchors to be provided and installed therein
under other Sections of these Specifications, and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
1) Slots shall be dovetail of not lighter than 24 gage zinc-coated steel with filler that prevents
concrete or water from entering and that can be easily removed or punctured for installing
anchors.
2) Wire inserts for attachment of wire hangers for suspended ceiling shall not be lighter than 7
gage. Zinc-coated inserts of the same section shall be set in the concrete.
3) Inserts for bolt hangers shall be of malleable iron or of cast or wrought steel. Inserts for bolt
hangers shall be either threaded or slotted as required by the type of hanger to be used.
These inserts shall have integral lugs to prevent turning.
4. CLASSES OF CONCRETE AND USAGE
a. Concrete of the various classes indicated and required under other Sections shall be proportioned
and mixed as specified in Clause 9, SECTION 2E.
Water-proof concrete shall be as structural concrete with the addition of an approved water
proofing admixture.
b. All concrete mix proportions shall be designed by the Contractor in accordance with the
applicable requirements of NI-2 comprising of cement, water, fine aggregate and coarse
aggregate in proportion to achieve the specified strength. The water cement ratio, the proportion
of fine aggregate, coarse aggregate and of cement to aggregate shall be such that the mixed
concrete is homogeneous, free from voids, weather tight and of maximum density consistent with
proper workability. Notwithstanding the requirements of NI- 2, the maximum slump shall not
3A Sheet 2 of 4
exceed 100 mm. Both the water and sand content shall be kept as low as possible to minimize
shrinkage.
5. MIXING CONCRETE
a. The cement, water and all aggregate shall be measured separately and accurately in weighing
machines approved by the Engineer.
b. Concrete shall be mixed in power or portable mixers of minimum capacity 0.2 m3, types and
capacities shall be approved by the Engineer.
c. In measuring the water for each batch of concrete, allowance shall be established and approved
for the content of the aggregates. The water content of the aggregate shall be measured before the
day's placing concrete and when they are to be placed immediately after delivery.
d. Each batch shall contain the minimum amount of water consistent with a concrete of adequate
workability for proper compaction by vibrator. The water-cement ratio shall be approved by the
Engineer and varied only with his approval. Any concrete containing too much water shall be
removed from the site and wasted as directed by the Engineer. Mixing shall continue until
concrete is uniform in color and consistency and the entire contents of the drums shall be
discharged before the materials of the succeeding batch are fed into drum.
e. The mixer shall be thoroughly cleaned at the end of each shift or any time when it has been out of
use for more than 30 minutes before any fresh concrete is mixed.
6. FORMS
a. All form works shall be sufficiently strong enough to resist the dead weight of concrete, any
temporary loads during construction and the effect of vibration during placing concrete without
bulginess or undue deflection.
b. Forms shall be constructed to keep the finished concrete surfaces within the specified tolerances.
Forms for beams and slabs shall be laid with an upward camber to ensure a level soffit. For
beams and slabs over 6 m span, the upward camber of the forms shall be 5 mm for every 3 m of
span. For cantilevered members, the forms at the free end shall be elevated by 5 mm for every 1.5
m of projection.
7. REINFORCEMENT
a. Bars in contact shall be firmly secured to each other with binding wires or crisp. The Contractor
shall ensure that all reinforcement is in the correct relation to the framework to keep the specified
concrete cover by use of spacing blocks, rings or other means approved by the Engineer, and also
that the reinforcement will not be moved during the placing concrete or under the effect of
vibration.
b. The top reinforcement in slabs shall be rigidly supported from the bottom reinforcement at 1.5 m
intervals in each direction. Sheets of mesh fabric shall be flat unless specified to be bent, and any
tendency to curl or twist shall be corrected before fixing.
3A Sheet 3 of 4
c. Spacing blocks and rings shall be composed of fine aggregate and cement of the same type and
color, and mixed in the same proportion as that of the concrete to be placed. Hairpins of 18 swg
soft iron wire shall be left projected from the spacing blocks to fasten them to the reinforcement.
Plastic or other proprietary spacers may be used subject to the prior approval of the Engineer.
Rings and blocks shall be the thickness of concrete cover shown on the Drawings and must be
matured in damp condition for at least 2 days before use.
d. Starter bars to columns and walls, etc., shall be fixed securely to the reinforcement in the concrete
and shall not pushed into the wet concrete after placing.
8. OPENING AND FIXTURES IN CONCRETE
a. The contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval detailed shop drawings of any fixings to
be permanently embedded in the concrete. Fixings which are likely to weaken the structure will
not be permitted.
b. Adequate slots or inserts shall be provided for anchoring members at openings. Slots and dowels
shall be provided for anchoring ends and tops of masonry partitions.
c. Inserts for hanger for piping and mechanical fixtures and their installation shall be as shown on
the approved shop drawings.
9. TOLERANCES
a. The surfaces of all concrete members after the forms have been opened shall not vary from the
dimensions shown on the Drawings with the tolerance given below.
1. The distance between the axis of two adjacent columns shall not exceed + 10 mm.
2. No column face shall exceed + 5 mm in relation to the corresponding faces of the two
adjacent columns in the same vertical plane.
3. Vertical concrete members shall not exceed + 10 mm from plumb in a height not exceeding
4.5 m, + 12 mm in a height over 4.5 m to 6.0 m, and + 15 mm in a height over 6.0 m.
4. The horizontal elevations of concrete members shall not exceed + 10 mm. The sum in
absolute value of the height differences of three points on any successive supports shall not
exceed 5 mm. Wall and slab surface shall not exceed 3 mm from the true plane under a 1.0 m
straight edge and 10 mm under a 3.0 m straight edge.
5. The cross sectional dimension of all concrete members to be covered shall not exceed + 6
mm, and for all exposed members + 3mm. No minus tolerance is permitted.
6. Special care shall be taken by the Contractor to obtain accurate cross sections and thicknesses
where members are in or about the same plane.
b. The dimensions of all members shall be checked at removing the forms and the Engineer shall be
informed immediately of any discrepancies. The Engineer may order the Contractor to cut back,
make good or cut out/or pour the concrete where the finished concrete does not comply with the
above tolerances.
3A Sheet 4 of 4
SECTION 3B
METAL WORK
SUB-SECTION 3B-1
STRUCTURAL STEEL
1. SCOPE
a. This Section includes all fabrication and erection of structural steel for buildings, and related
b. References.
SECTION 3A CONCRETE
SECTION 3H, FINISHES.
2. GENERAL
a. Requirements for metal work prescribed in this Section shall apply for the "Metal Work of Civil
Works" to the extent applicable.
b. The AISC "Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for
Buildings" shall govern the work. Welding shall be done in accordance with the AWS code D1.1
and as herein specified or any other welding standard approved by the Engineer.
3. FABRICATION
a. Shop connection shall be made as detailed on the Drawings or as approved by the Engineer.
b. For exact and correct field connections, the Contractor shall provide bolted or welded
connections as shown on the Drawings or as approved by the Engineer, and use high strength
threaded fasteners for bolted connection, except where standard threaded fasteners are not
permitted.
c. Tightening of high strength bolts shall be made in accordance with the requirements of AISC,
"Specifications for Structural Joints".
d. When steel members are to be rested on concrete walls, bearing plates shall be provided under the
steel members.
3B-1 Sheet 1 of 2
4. ERECTION
a. Erection of structural steel shall be made in accordance with the AISC "Code of Standard
Practice".
b. Loose bearing plates shall be set, wedged and shimmed and individual pieces shall be erected
within a deviation from vertical level and alignment less than 1 in 500.
c. Field assembling shall be executed in accordance with the approved assembling procedure and as
itemized hereunder.
1) Structural steel frames shall be assembled accurately to the lines and elevations indicated on
the Drawings within the specified erection tolerance, on which various members forming
parts of a complete frame or structure are aligned and adjusted accurately before fastening.
2) Splices of compression members shall be fastened after the abutting surfaces have been
brought completely into contact. Splices shall be permitted only where indicated.
3) At bearing surfaces and surfaces in permanent contact, rust and scale shall be cleaned before
members are assembled.
4) Field connection shall be bolted and welded as specified in clause 3, "Fabrication".
5) Run-off tabs shall be completely removed and surfaces shall be grinned where requested by
the Engineer. Weld spatter of surface contact shall be cleaned.
d. Field correction of fabrication by gas cutting shall not be permitted on any major member in the
structural framing without prior approval of the Engineer.
e. Structural steel members of high strength steels shall be clearly marked to permit visual
verification of the grade of steel used.
5. RELATED WORK.
a. Installation of anchor bolts and the like to be embedded in foundation concrete, and grouting
under bearing surfaces shall conform to the applicable requirements of SECTION 3A,
CONCRETE.
b. Shop painting and field touch-up painting on bolt heads, nuts, field welds and abrasions in shop
coat after erection shall conform to the applicable requirements of SECTION 3H, FINISHES.
3B-1 Sheet 2 of 2
SUB-SECTION 3B-2
SHEET METAL WORK
1. SCOPE
a. This Section includes all fabrication and erection of sheet metal for buildings and related works
b. Reference.
SECTION 3E, MOISTURE PROTECTION.
2. GENERAL
a. Sheet metal items shall be fabricated in accordance with the thickness or weight shown on the
Drawings or specified herein. Surfaces that are to receive sheet metal and underpayments shall be
even, smooth, sound, thoroughly clean and dry, and free from defects that might affect the
application. Sheet metal items shall be furnished in 2.4 to 3 meter length except that electrometric
flashing may be furnished in rolls of manufacturer's stock lengths. Single pieces less than 2.4
meter long may be used to connect factory fabricated sheet metals at inside and outside corners,
and at ends of runs. Cutting, fitting, drilling, and other operations in connection with sheet metal
required to accommodate the work of other trades shall be performed by sheet metal mechanics.
Accessories and other items essential to complete the sheet metal installation, though not
specifically indicated or specified, shall be provided. Where sheet metal abuts or extends into
adjacent materials, the juncture shall be executed in a manner to assure weather-tight
construction. Factory fabricated components such as regrets and flashing shall be packed in
cartons which are marked with the manufacturer's name or trade name.
b. The following publications listed below, but referred to thereafter by basic designation only, form
a part of this Specification to the applicable extent indicated in the references thereto.
ASTM Publications.
B 209 Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate.

B 211 Aluminum Alloy Bars, Rods and Wire.
B 221 Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes and Tubes.
B 316 Aluminum Alloy Rivet and Cold-heading Wire and Rods.
c. Shop drawing showing complete erection layouts, details and installation instructions shall be
submitted for approval. Materials shall not be delivered to the site until these shop drawings have
been approved by the Engineer. Details and layout shall show weights, gages, or thick nesses of
sheet metal, joining, expansion joint spacing, and procedures to be followed during installation.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any errors of detailing and fabrication and for the correct
fitting of sheet metal work as shown on the shop drawings.
Scaled catalogue cuts shall be submitted for factory fabricated items. Shop drawings shall include
details of building expansion joints and flashing at roof penetrations.
3B-2 Sheet 1 of 4
3. MATERIALS
Materials shall conform to the respective specifications and other requirements specified below, or be
of approved equal.
a. Aluminum Alloy
1) Aluminum alloy sheets shall conform to ASTM B 209, a clad 3003, a clad 3004 or a clad
3005 with appropriate temper unless temper is specified herein. Aluminum items specified as
EXPOSED SHEET METAL shall be factory painted with color approved by the Engineer.
2) Extrusions shall conform to ASTM B 221, alloy 6063 with temper T5.
3) Rivets shall conform to ASTM B 316, alloy 1100, 5052, 5056, 6053 or 6061 with appropriate
temper unless otherwise specified.
4) Screws, bolts, nuts and wire shall conform to ASTM B 211, alloy 1100, 5052 or 6061 with
appropriate temper, unless otherwise specified.
b. Sealing Compound.
Sealing compound referred to herein are specified in SECTION 3E, MOISTURE PROTECTION.
c. Fastening Materials.
Fastening materials not specified for a particular sheet metal application shall be of the type best
suited for the intended purpose. Nails shall be barbed annular thread or screw type. Aluminum
nails, rivets, screws, bolts and nuts shall be used for fastening aluminum items.
d. Plastic hard setting sealant shall be of a type as recommended by the aluminum producer.
4. SAMPLES.
The Contractor shall submit samples of materials proposed for use to the Engineer for approval.
Sufficient samples shall be provided for confirmation testing to be executed by the Contractor upon
request by the Engineer. Certificates of each material of compliance with specification requirements
shall accompany the samples.
5. HANDLING AND STORAGE.
Sheet metal items shall be carefully handled to prevent damage to the surfaces, edges and ends, and
shall be stored at the site above the ground in a covered and dry location. Damaged items that cannot
be restored to like new condition will be rejected and shall be replaced with no additional cost to the
Employer.
3B-2 Sheet 2 of 4
6. FASTENING
a. Nailing of sheet metal shall be confined generally to sheet metal having a width of less than 15
cm. Nailing of flashings shall be confined to one edge only. Nails shall be evenly spaced not over
75 mm on centers and approximately 12 mm from edge unless otherwise specified or indicated.
Where sheet metal is applied to other than wood surfaces, detailed shop drawings shall include
locations for sleepers and nailing strips.
b. Cleats shall be provided where specified or required and shall be evenly spaced not over than 30
cm on centers unless otherwise specified or indicated. One end of cleat shall be secured with two
nails and the cleat folded back over the nail heads. The other end shall be locked into the seam.
c. Bolts, rivets and screws shall be installed where indicated or required.
7. EXPANSION JOINTS.
a. Joints consist of locked, lapped, butted and riveted types. Aluminum joint shall be either lapped
or expansion joints or lock jointed, riveted, and filled with hard setting sealant. The types of joints
to be used and the sealants required shall be as indicated on the Drawings unless otherwise
specified. Sealants are specified in SECTION 3E, MOISTURE PROTECTION.
b. Building expansion joints for roofs and walls shall be provided at location indicated on the
Drawings. Sheet metal expansion joints shall be located at intervals or spacing as specified
hereinafter.
c. Expansion and construction joints for sheet metal shall be provided at 10 meter intervals for
aluminum except that where the distance between the last expansion joint and the end of the
continuous run is more than half the required interval spacing, an additional, joint shall be
provided and evenly spaced.
8. FLASHINGS
Flashings shall be installed at intersections of roof with vertical surfaces and at projections through
roof, except that flashing for electrical conduit projections through roof or walls is covered in
appropriate sections for such work. Cap flashing shall be turned around exterior corners of masonry
or concrete walls at least 50 mm, shall be secured into masonry joints and into concrete with
expansion anchors, and shall be sealed with sealing compound. Cap and base flashing for exterior and
interior corners shall be factory-fabricated units. Corner units shall have mitered joints and shall be
installed with 75 mm lap joint over flashings on each side.
Unless otherwise indicated, through wall flashing shall be terminated 12 mm inside each exposed face
of the wall. Except as otherwise indicated, cap flashings shall be provided over base flashings.
Perforations in flashings made by masonry shall be covered up by an application of bituminous
plastic cement anchors at the perforation. Flashing shall be installed on top of joint reinforcement.
3B-2 Sheet 3 of 4
9. EDGE STRIP
A continuous edge strip shall be provided where indicated or specified to secure loose edges of the
sheet metal work. Butt joints shall be spaced approximately 3 mm apart. The strip shall be fastened to
the supporting construction with nails evenly spaced not over 300 mm on centers. Where the
fastening is to be made to concrete or masonry, screw shall be used and shall be driven in expansion
shields set in concrete or masonry.
3B-2 Sheet 4 of 4
SUB-SECTION 3B-3
CORRUGATED METAL SHEET
1. SCOPE
This Section includes material and installation of corrugated metal sheet for buildings and
2. GENERAL
a. Corrugated metal sheet shall be installed in the areas shown on the Drawings.
b. The following publications listed below, but referred to thereafter by basic designation
only, form a part of this Specification to the extent indicated by the reference thereto.
Australian Standard (AS) Publication.,
AS 1379 Hot-dipped Zinc-coated or Aluminum zinc Coated Steel Sheet in Coil or Cut
Lengths.
c. The Contractor shall submit catalogue and sample of corrugated metal sheet to the
Engineer for approval. No materials shall be delivered to the site without prior approval
of the Engineer. Also manufacturer's printed specifications, standard, installation
instruction and shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
3. MATERIALS
a. Sheet Metal Roofing shall be of the high quality products best suited for the intended
purpose, and shall be capable of resisting a load of 120 kg/m2 and minimum thickness of
0.5 mm. Metal sheet shall be of steel sheet coated with combined zinc and aluminum,
where the system of process is a continuously hot-dipped coating. The weight of coating
shall be not less than 200 g/m2.
b. The sheets shall be damp-proof, fire-proof and rot-proof. Accessory pieces such as ridge
pieces, closer aprons, hips, special shapes, and wall joints shall be of light asbestos
cement.
c. Nails shall be of galvanized steel best suited for the work.
3B-3 Sheet 1 of 3
4. STORAGE
1) Materials shall be carefully handled and stored with covers to protect them from rain, sun,
mud, and any other injurious actions.
2) Materials shall be delivered in the original packages and containers, and shall be marked
or labeled plainly manufacturer’s name and brands, and production date.
3) Corrugated metal sheet shall be stored off the ground under roof, supported with strips,
holding the shape of materials shall be covered with a clean tarpaulin or plastic sheet.
Coverings shall be rigged free of the stacked to allow air circulation and avoid possible
contamination of the materials by accumulation of water, dirt or other corrosive agents.
5. INSTALLATION
1) General
a. Install deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations and approved Shop Drawings, and as specified herein, using
electric seamed for tightening the seams of lapped sections of the roof.
2) Standing Seam
1) Forming
One or both sides of the metal coil extruded with the uncoiled is folded up at an
angle of 90 degrees with a light weight, portable forming machine.
2) Clip fixing
Slide clips shall be fixed to a sheathing with fasteners along the width of the formed
sheet and at intervals according to the wind pressure. The clips shall fix the
sheathing and also absorb expansion and contraction of stainless steel with a sliding
mechanism.
3) Seam welding
After cutting the formed panel to the prescribed length, insert slide clips at
appropriate intervals. The rises are seam-welded at a speed of 4 meters per minute
with a seam-welding machine. A metallic membrane with perfectly sealed rises is
obtained by this welding.
4) Specialty formed part welding
Welding of specialty formed parts is performed with a detail seam welding machine
required by system manufacturer.
3B-3 Sheet 2 of 3
5) Seam folding
The upper part of the seam-welded rise shall be folded down with the folding
machine. The sharp edge of the rise is eliminated. Distortion from thermal stress at
the time of welding is rectified by this process. Distance between seam shall be 40
mm.
6) Touch up
After completion of installation, wire brush, clean and touch up decking and
accessories, where field cut, welded or otherwise damaged, with galvanizing repair
paint as provided by the manufacturer, applied in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
c. Placing shall be started from the sheets of the lowest row upward and proceeded in the
direction opposite to the prevailing wind direction.
d. The Contractor shall take into account the prevailing wind direction when he provides the
locations of cut.
6. CLEANING
Exposed surfaces of sheet metal roofing shall be clean and free from dirt, scratches, dents,
warping, waviness, buckling; broken parts or units, cracks, chips; mis-alignment or
improperly fitted joints; stains, discoloration or other defects or damages. All defective work
or damage shall be restored or replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
3B-3 Sheet 3 of 3
SUB-SECTION 3B-4
STEEL MESH WORK
1. SCOPE
This Section includes the steel mesh work for buildings and related items required under the Contract.
2. GENERAL
a. Steel mesh items shall be fabricated with size of mesh and thickness of wire as shown on the
Drawings.
b. Accessories and other items essential to complete the steel mesh installations, though not
specifically indicated or specified, shall be provided.
c. Submittals
1. The Contractor shall submit catalogue and samples of materials proposed to use to the
Engineer for approval before materials represented by the samples are delivered to the site.
2. Manufacturer's printed specifications, standards, installation, instructions and shop drawings

shall also be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
3. MATERIALS
The steel mesh shall be factory-fabricated to 50 x 50 mm mesh size with 3.25 mm thickness of wire,
galvanized, high durability and rust proofing.
a. Materials shall be delivered to the site in the original packages and shall be marked or labeled
plainly manufacturer's name and brands, and production date.
b. Steel mesh shall be stored off ground under roof supported with strips, holding the shape of
original packages. Where necessary stored in open air, the materials shall be protected with an
adequate cover.
5. INSTALLATION
Installation of steel mesh shall comply with the applicable requirements of SUB-SECTION 3B-5,
MISCELLANEOUS METAL WORK hereinafter.
3B-4 Sheet 1 of 1
SUB-SECTION 3B-5
MISCELLANEOUS METAL WORK
1. SCOPE
a. This section includes all miscellaneous metal work for buildings and related items required under
the Contract.
b. References
SECTION 3F, DOORS WINDOWS, LOUVERS, GLASSES AND HARDWARE
SECTION 3H, FINISHES
2. GENERAL
a. The Contractor shall verify all measurements and take all field measurements necessary before
fabrication.
b. Exposed fastening shall be compatible materials, shall generally match in finish, and shall
harmonize with the material to which fastenings are applied.
c. Materials and parts necessary to complete each item, even though such work is not definitely
shown or specified, shall be included.
d. Miscellaneous bolts and anchors, rebates, lugs, brackets, supports, braces and connections
necessary specified for completion of the miscellaneous metal work shall be provided.
e. Joint exposed to the weather shall be formed to exclude water.
f. The following publications listed below, but referred to thereafter by basic designation only, form
a part of this Specification to the extent indicated by the references thereto.
1. JIS Publications
JIS B 1180 Hexagon Head Bolts
JIS B 1181 Hexagon Nuts
JIS B 1256 Plain Washers
JIS B 3101 Rolled Steel for General Structure
JIS H 4000 Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheets and Plates, Strip and Coiled Sheets
JIS H 4100 Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Extruded Shapes
3B-5 Sheet 1 of 4
2. ASTM Publications
A 123 Zinc (Hot-galvanized) Coating on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed and
Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strip
A 153 Zinc Coatings (Hot-dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
A 307 Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Standard Fastener
A 386 Zinc Coating (Hot-dip) on Assembled Steel Products
3. AWS Publication
D1.1 Structural Welding Code
g. Shop drawings to be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer for approval along with
catalogue cuts and templates, erection and installation details for all miscellaneous metal items
shall indicate thickness, type, grade, class of metal and dimensions, and shall show construction
details, reinforcement, anchorage and installation with relation to the construction.
h. Unless requirement is waived in writing, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer 2 copies of
mill test reports certifying that materials meet specified requirements.
3. MATERIALS
Materials shall conform to the requirements specified for the particular item and where these
requirements are not specified in detail, the materials shall be suitable for the intended usage of the
items.
a. Steel plate, shapes and bars shall conform to the requirements of JIS G 3101 (SS 41) or
equivalent.
b. Hexagon head bolts and nuts shall be fabricated from materials conforming to JIS G 3101 (SS 41)
or equivalent and fabricated to conforming to the following.
1. Hexagon head bolts : JIS B 1180 or equivalent
2. Hexagon nuts : JIS B 1181 or equivalent
3. Plain washers : JIS B 1256 or equivalent
c. Expansion bolts shall be of wedged type or metal expansion shield type. Fiber sleeves shall not be
permitted.
d. Holder strip for gutter and downspout, grating unit and accessories, etc., shall be of galvanized
steel approved by the Engineer
3B-5 Sheet 2 of 4
e. Miscellaneous fixing angle clips and bolts etc., for toilet partitions, urinal screen, counter,
shelves, etc., shall be of chrome plate and approved by the Engineer
f. Hardware shall be in accordance with BUILDER'S HARDWARE in SECTION 3F.
a. Materials shall be delivered in the original packages and shall be marked or labeled plainly
manufacturer's name and brands, and production date.
b. The material shall be stored out of contact with the ground in such manner and location to
minimize contaminations and deterioration.
5. GALVANIZING AND PRIMING
a. Galvanizing where called for shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 123, A 153 and A
386 as applicable. The weight of zinc coating shall be not less than 550 g/m2 of coated surfaces,
unless otherwise specified.
b. All galvanized steel in contact with preservative treated wood or concrete shall be coated with a
bituminous paint on the contact surfaces.
c. Prime painting where called for shall be prime painted in the shop after fabrication.
1. The following areas shall be omitted from prime painting.
a. Steel surfaces to be embedded in concrete
b. Surfaces to be field welded
c. Surfaces to be fastened with bolt
2. Preparation of surfaces, prime paint and workmanship shall comply with SECTION 3H,
FINISHES
6. DISSIMILAR MATERIALS
Where dissimilar metals are in contact, the surfaces shall be protected with a coat of bituminous paint
to prevent galvanic or corrosive action.
7. WORKMANSHIP
Miscellaneous metal work shall be well formed to shape and size with sharp lines and angles and true
curves.
Drilling and punching shall produce clean true lines and surfaces. Welding shall be continuous along
the entire area of contact, except where tack welding is permitted. Exposed connections of work in
3B-5 Sheet 3 of 4
place shall not be tack welded. Welds shall be ground smooth. Where lights fits are required, joint
shall be milled to a close fit. Corner joints shall be coped or mitered, well formed and in true
alignment. Metal work shall be accurately set to establish lines and elevations and securely fastened
in place. Works shall be executed and finished in accordance with approved drawings, cuts, details
and samples.
8. SCHEDULE OF MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
a. Listing herein indicates primary or principal items of work only and such listings are not entirely
comprehensive nor complete.
b. Drawings of different disciplines interrelate and necessarily overlap and duplicate certain aspects
of work required. The Contractor shall correlate drawings to avoid duplicating work required and
to provide all items necessary to complete the work as intended under this Contract.
9. PAINTING
For field touch-up painting of bolt heads, nuts, field welds and abrasions in shop coat after erection,
reference shall be made to SECTION 3H, FINISHES.
3B-5 Sheet 4 of 4
SUB-SECTION 3B-6
BUILDING INSULATION
1. SCOPE
This section covers the provision and installation of building insulation materials as specified
herein, included but not limited to the framing and accessories required for installation on
locations as shown on drawings.
Section Includes :
Thermal Insulation for metal roofing
2. REFERENCES :
American Society for Testing of Materials (ASTM) : C 692 – 77 Rockwood Thermal Insulation.
3. SUBMITTALS
a. Product Data : Submit manufacturer’s technical brochure for type of insulation.
b. Manufacturer’s Instructions : Submit manufacturer’s printed installation instructions for each

product, including attachment recommendations.
4. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
a. Contractor should deliver, store, handle, and protect the products.
b. Store materials raised off floor or ground and under cover to keep dry and protected from
weather, direct sun light, contamination, and damage from construction operations.
5. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
a. Do not install insulation during inclement weather or when surfaces are moist.
6. SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
a. Do not begin to work until substrate work is complete and work of other trades which will be
concealed by work of this section has been approved.
7. PRODUCTS
7.1 Building Thermal Insulation
Acceptable Products : or equal approved.
3B-6 Sheet 1 of 2
1. Thickness of 25 mm for Roof Insulation Rockwood
2. Medium density 50 kg/m2
3. Non combustible conform to ASTM 136 – 82
4. Low thermal conductivity
7.2 Accessories
a. Joint Tape : Pressure sensitive type recommended by insulation manufacturer.
b. Mechanical Fasteners, Clips and Mesh :

Types recommended by insulation manufacturer.
8. EXECUTION
8.1 Examination
a. Examine support systems and adjacent construction for conditions that would
adversely effect execution. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are
corrected. Beginning or execution will constitute acceptance of existing conditions.
b. Verify that work of other trades which will be covered by insulation is complete,
approved, and tested.
c. Verify that adequate space is provided to achieve “R” values indicated.
8.2 Installation
a. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions after, mechanical and

electrical service have been installed. Provide mechanical fasteners, wire mesh or
other accessories to assure insulation remains in placed position.
b. Fit insulation tight within spaces and tight to exterior side of plumbing, mechanical
and electric services within plane of insulation leaving no gaps or voids.
Butt insulation tightly. Cut and fit tightly around items penetrating insulation.
Stagger butt joints.
c. Use bats free of damage. Do not allow insulation to obstruct vents.
d. Within metal framing systems install full height and width in such manner that voids
or openings do not occur. Insulation is required for full width between studs,
including cavity or each stud.
e. Cut and trim insulation neatly, to fit spaces. Cut insulation oversize to ensure tight
butt joints when installed. Cut insulation to fit around protrusions and irregularly
shaped projections.
8.3 Protection
a. Protect insulation from7 moisture, building is made watertight
3B-6 Sheet 2 of 2
SECTION 3C
MASONRY
1. SCOPE
a. This Section sets forth materials and installation of masonry work, and related work to be carried
out under the Contract.
b. References
1) SECTION 3A, CONCRETE
2) SECTION 3B, METAL WORK
3) SECTION 3H, FINISHES
2. GENERAL
a. The Contractor shall furnish all labor and material to complete the masonry work as shown on the
Drawings and as specified herein. The work shall include the following, but not limited to.
1) Embedding bricks or concrete blocks in mortar
2) Plastering and painting
3) Installing temporary works such as scaffolding, platforms, steps, etc.
A 615 Deformed and Plain Billet-steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
A 616 Rail-steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
C 33 Concrete Aggregates
C 62 Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units from Clay or Shale)
C 270 Mortar for unit Masonry
C 427 Moisture Condition of Hardened Concrete by the Relative Humidity Method
D 1056 Testing Sponge and Expanded Cellular Rubber Products
D 1667 Sponge Made from Closed Cell Poly (Vinyl Chloride), or Copolymers thereof
3C Sheet 1 of 6
2) JIS Publication
JIS G 3112 Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
3) NI Publications
NI-2 (1971)
NI-10 (1975)
4) PUBBI Publication
c. Before commencing any masonry work, the Contractor shall confer with other trades to ensure all
piping, conduits, drains, sleeves, bolts, hangers, fixing lugs or timber fillets, or any other
materials necessary to be installed in brick or block work at the time of its erection have been
fixed.
d. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings showing full details of installation procedures of
block or brick unit, reinforcement, anchor and ties, etc., to the Engineer for approval.
3. MATERIAL
Material shall conform to the respective specifications and other requirements specified below.
a. Concrete Blocks
1) Concrete blocks shall be manufactured from ordinary Portland cement and dense aggregate,
and comply with PUBBI 1982 chapter 16, unless otherwise described herein.
2) Concrete block shall be hollow type, 400 x 200 x 100 mm in nominal size.
b. Bricks
Bricks shall be well-baked, hard, sound and square with well defined arises even and uniform in
color, free from any cracks, flaws or other defects and shall comply with the requirements of NI-
10.
c. Bedding Mortar
1) Mortar for embedding the bricks shall be composed of one part of cement to four parts of
sand by volume, shall have a compressive strength of 150 kg/cam at 28 days, and shall be
tested in an approved laboratory at the expense of the Contractor. When tested for water
retention, the mortar shall have a flow, after suction, of 75 % or more when mixed to an
initial flow of 125 to 140 %. When tested for compressive strength, mortar shall be mixed to
a flow of 100 to 115 %.
2) Watertight mortar shall be composed of one part of cement to two parts of sand by volume.
3C Sheet 2 of 6
d. Jointing Plaster
Plaster shall be composed of one part of cement to four parts of sand by volume, for which
materials shall comply with the same specification as for bedding mortar.
e. Reinforcement
Reinforcing steel bars and rods shall conform to JIS G 3112 SR. 24, SD or equivalent. Vertical
reinforcement shall be every 1500 mm and horizontal reinforcement shall be arranged every 1000
mm. All reinforcement shall be fastened to vertical stock and columns.
4. SAMPLING AND TESTING
a. Sampling and testing may be performed by an independent commercial testing laboratory subject
to the approval of the Engineer at the expense of the Contractor. Certified copies of laboratory
test reports including all test data shall be submitted at least 10 days before delivery of materials
to the site.
b. Mortar shall be laboratory-proportioned and tested. Certified copies of approved laboratory-

established proportions shall be submitted with the required test reports and test data. Approved
laboratory-established proportions shall not be changed and materials with different physical or
chemical characteristic shall not be used in mortar for the work unless additional evidence that
the mortar meets the specified requirements is furnished by the Contractor and approved by the
Engineer.
c. The following samples shall be submitted by the Contractor for the Engineer's approval and in
addition, representative samples shall be taken from stockpiles at the site periodically as required
by the Engineer for testing or checking during the progress of the work.
1) Concrete blocks : Shapes, sizes and kinds in sufficient numbers to show full range of
quality, color and texture.
2) Brick units : Shapes, sizes and kinds in sufficient numbers to show full range of color
and texture.
3) Anchor and ties : Two of each type proposed for use.
5. HANDLING AND STORAGE
a. Materials shall be handled, stored and protected in an approved manner to avoid chipping,
breakage, contact with soil or contaminating material, and exposure to the elements.
b. Cementations materials and aggregates shall be stored in such a manner as to prevent

deterioration or instruction of foreign matter. Caked or hardened cementations material will not
be permitted to use in the work. Bagged cement stored for more than 6 months shall be retested
before use.
3C Sheet 3 of 6
c. Anchors, ties, steel reinforcing bars, joints and rods shall be stored free of rust and loose scale.
6. ERECTION
No unit having a film of water on its surface shall be laid. Masonry shall be laid plumb, true to line,
with level courses accurately spaced. Bond pattern shall be kept plum throughout. Corners and
reveals shall be plum and true. Vertical joints shall be shoved tight.
Each unit shall be adjusted to final position while mortar is still soft and plastic. Any unit that is
disturbed after mortar has stiffened shall be removed and re-laid with fresh mortar. Courses shall be
so spaced that backing masonry will level off and flush with the face at all joints where ties occur.
Chases and raked-out joints shall be kept free from mortar or other debris.
The size of any 2 adjacent units shall be within permitted tolerances so that the difference between the
vertical faces of such units shall not exceed 3 mm in exposed to-view or painted walls. Units in
exposed- to-view or painted walls shall be free from chipped edges or other imperfections detracting
from the appearance of the finished work.
a. Anchorage to Concrete and Steel Structure
The Contractor shall submit the detailed shop drawings showing anchorage to abutting walls and
columns, or anchorage to underside of beams to the Engineer for approval. Cells within vertical
planes of the anchors shall be filled with grout for full height of walls or partitions.
b. Cutting and Fitting
Cutting and fitting shall be done by masonry mechanics, wherever possible, full units of the
proper size shall be used in lieu of cut units. Cut edges shall be clean, true and sharp. Openings
shall be carefully cut, formed or otherwise neatly made for recessed items and for electrical,
plumbing or other mechanical installations so that wall plates, cover plates or escutcheons
required by the installation will completely conceal the openings and will have bottoms in
alignment with lower edge of masonry joints. Reinforced masonry lintels shall be provided above
openings over 300 mm wide for pipe, ducts and cable trays, unless steel sleeves are used.
c. Embedded Items
Spaces around door and window frames and other built in item shall be filled solidly with mortar.
Openings around flush-mounted electrical outlet boxes in wet locations shall be pointed flush
with mortar including flush joint above the box. Anchors, ties, wall plugs, accessories, flashings,
pipe sleeves, and other items required to be built in shall be built in as the masonry work
progresses. Anchors, ties and joint reinforcement shall be fully embedded in mortar. Cells
receiving anchor bolts shall be filled solidly with mortar or grout.
d. Unfinished work shall be stepped back for joining with new work. Too thing may be resorted to
only when specifically approved. Before laying new work, loose mortar shall be removed and the
exposed joint shall be thoroughly cleaned.
3C Sheet 4 of 6
e. Protection
Surfaces of masonry not being worked on shall be properly protected at all times. At the end of
each workday period and when rain is imminent, the tops of exposed masonry shall be covered
with strong non-staining water proof membrane secured in place and in a manner that will
prevent moisture from accumulating within the unfinished wall. Adequate provisions shall be
made during construction to prevent damage by wind.
f. Mortar
Materials shall be accurately mixed to laboratory-established proportions with as much water as

may be necessary to produce the wettest workable consistency possible. Mortar shall be placed in
final position within one hour after mixing. Mortar not used or that has started to set within this
time interval shall be discarded.
g. Jointing
Joints in exposed-to-view or painted wall and partitions, except control joints, joints to be pointed
or calked or sealed, and openings around flush mounted electrical outlet boxes in wet locations
shall be tooled slightly concave with the mortar thoroughly compacted and pressed against the
edges of the units. Tooling shall be done when the mortar is thumbprint hard. The tooled joints
shall be finished to uniform and true lines and surfaces, smooth, and free of tool marks. Joints
between exterior door and window frames and abutting masonry shall be raked to 9 mm depth
along both sides of frame. Control joints where constructed with mortar, dummy joints in bond
beams, joints between wood frames and masonry, and at horizontal and vertical faces of joints at
ends and in wash surfaces of slip sills and coping's, and other joints where so indicated shall be
raked to 19 mm depth on the weather side of exterior masonry walls.
1) Masonry Wall or Partition Intersections
Each course shall be bonded at exterior corners and where masonry bond is indicated.
Masonry walls or partitions shall have reinforced concrete bond beams, and shall be tied
together at intermediate bond beams unless otherwise indicated. Reinforcing steel ties shall
be extended 60 cm or more within the abutting partition bond beam. At other intersections,
masonry walls shall be tied together with rigid steel anchors spaced not over 60 cm on centers
vertically with turned ends of anchors embedded in cells of units filled solid with mortar.
2) Partitions shall be continuous from floor to underside of floor or roof construction above
where so indicated. Where suspended ceilings on both sides of partitions are indicated, the
partitions other than those shown to be continuous may be stopped approximately 100 mm
above the ceiling level.
h. Sills, lintels and jambs shall be made with reinforced concrete, and shall be installed plumb, true
to line and level in accurate dimensions, and shall have proper clearance for installation of door
and window frames as shown on the Drawings.
3C Sheet 5 of 6
i. Anchorage for installation of door and window frames shall be set in proper positions and
clearance between concrete and shall be solidly filled with a fill of mortar. The abutting joints in
the masonry walls and concrete work shall be solidly tied.
7. WORKMANSHIP
All masonry work shall be set out and built to the dimensions shown on the Drawings or approved
shop drawings. The bricks or blocks shall be laid and jointed with perfectly level and horizontal joints
and all walls plumb perpendicular. Each course shall be well flushed up with mortar and with joints
between courses 9 mm thick. Specially for concrete block wall, horizontal joints shall be raked 3 mm
deep to form a key. The concrete block work shall be carried up evenly at regular stages and no one
part shall be raised more than one meter above any other part at any time. Concrete block work which
is left at different levels shall be raked back. The Contractor shall allow for leaving temporarily open
joints under structural members. These open joints shall be left to allow the structural members to
take up their full deflection and the open joints shall be wedged and pinned up after the structural
members have been fully loaded and before the completion of the works.
Horizontal reinforcement using steel bar 10 mm shall be arrange every 1000 mm height, fastened to
columns.
Vertical reinforcement using steel bar 10 mm shall be arrange every 1500 mm fastened or fixed to
vertical stacle.
8. PAINTING AND CLEANING
a. Mortar daubs or splashing, before setting or hardening, shall be completely removed from
masonry unit surfaces that will be exposed or painted. Before completion of the work, all defects
in joints of masonry to be exposed or painted shall be raked out as necessary filled with mortar,
and tooled to match existing joints. Masonry surfaces shall not be cleaned, other than removing
excess surface mortar until mortar in joints has hardened. Masonry surfaces shall be left clean,
free of mortar daubs, dirt, stain and discoloration including scum from cleaning operations, and
with tight mortar joints throughout. Metal tools and metal brushes shall not be used for cleaning.
b. Painting shall be carried out on the prepared masonry surfaces in accordance with the applicable
requirements of SECTION 3H, FINISHES.
3C Sheet 6 of 6
SECTION 3D
CARPENTRY
1. SCOPE
This Section includes all carpentry work for buildings and related work required under the Contract.
2. GENERAL
a. Submittal.
1) Refer to SECTION 1H, SUBMITTALS.
2) The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, shop drawings for all carpentry and other wood
work items as required sufficiently in advance of need to allow the Engineer 30 days for
review and approval. Shop drawings shall indicate materials and details of construction,
methods of fastening, and erection details. No materials shall be delivered to the site until
these shop drawings have been approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be
responsible for all errors of detailing and fabrication, and for the correct fitting of fabricated
items shown on the Drawings or approved shop drawings.
1) NI Publication : NI-5.
2) PUBBI 1982.
3) PKKI 1961.
4) ASTM Publications.
5) JIS Publications.
3. MATERIALS
a. Lumber.
Lumber shall be of grade A, class I and with durability and strength in accordance with NI-5 and
as listed hereunder for the respective purposes to be used in the work.
1) Yard Lumber.
Yard lumber shall be of grades, sizes and patterns generally intended for ordinary
construction and general building construction.
3D Sheet 1 of 5
2) Selected Lumber.
Selected lumber shall be of good appearance and finishing qualities. Lumber which is to
receive natural finishes shall be practically clear, or of high quality and generally clear.
Lumber which is to receive paint finishes shall be suitable for receiving high quality paint
finishes.
3) Common Lumber.
Lumber for general construction and utility purposes shall be suitable for better type
construction purposes or well adopted for good standard construction for standard
construction use. For less exacting construction purposes, lumber may be lowest recognized
grade but must be suitable for the purposes.
b. Sizes and Patterns.
Lumber shall be surfaced four sides, and dressed size of lumber shall conform to the applicable
provision of NI-5, 1961. Lumber shall be worked to such patterns as are indicated or specified.
Worked material, unless otherwise indicated, shall conform to the standard patterns shown in the
current grading rules for the species.
c. Moisture Content.
Except as specified hereinafter, lumber to be incorporated in the permanent structure shall

conform to the moisture content requirements of NI-5, 1961 as applicable. Lumber treated with
water-borne preservatives shall be dried to a moisture content not exceeding 19% after treatment.
1) Common 50 mm Lumber and Boards.
Upon receipt of application of the Contractor, the Engineer may permit the Contractor to
furnish common 50 mm dimension lumber and boards or lumber of 50 mm and thinner
having a moisture content in excess of the foregoing requirements subject to the following
conditions.
a) Lumber shall be suitably piled under adequate cover for air- drying on the site at no
b) Treated lumber shall be air-dried to a moisture content conforming to the applicable

foregoing specification.
2) Interior finishing lumber shall be kiln-dried and at the time of delivery to the site, the
moisture content shall not exceed 12% for material 25 mm or less thickness, and shall not
exceed 15% for material over 25 mm in thickness. Air-dried lumber may be used provided
the moisture content shall not exceed the percentages specified herein after air-drying on site.
3) Wood work that is assembled or built up more than one piece at the mill, except doors, shall
have a moisture content not exceed 12% at the time of delivery to the site.
3D Sheet 2 of 5
d. Plywood.
The minimum number of plies required for plywood shall be 3 plies for 4 to 9 mm thick, and 5
plies for 11 to 19 mm thick. Plywood to be pressure-preservative treated shall be fully-
waterproof-flue type. Grade for preservative-treated plywood shall not be less than that specified
for the specific use. Plywood shall be clean and smoothly sanded on 2 sides. Shelves are
considered to be exposed.
e. Trim.
Materials for trim shall be the species in accordance with schedule specified herein or approved
equivalent, designed as indicated for such items as handrails, patterns in accordance with grading
rules for the species for such items as door, fascias, baseboards and caps, assembled and sanded at
the mill insofar as practicable, in maximum practicable length, and with permitted finger joints
when paint finishes are to be received.
f. Accessories and Nails.
1) Anchor bolts shall be of steel, galvanized, size as indicated, complete with nuts and washers.
2) Bolts, lug, toggle, miscellaneous bolts and screws shall be of type, grade, class and size best
suited for the intended use, galvanized or corrosion resistant.
3) Bolts, nuts and stud shall comply with the applicable requirements of NI-5, 1961.
4) Toggle bolts, screw expansion and sleeve bolts shall comply with JIS N 1180 and B 1181, or
equivalent.
5) Screws shall comply with NI-3, 1971
a. Lumber shall be delivered to the site in undamaged condition, stored in fully covered and well
ventilated areas protected from extreme changes in temperature and humidity.
b. Interior finish shall be stored at the site in approved weather tight enclosures and shall not be
brought into the building until the plastering has been completed and is completely dry.
5. PRESERVATIVE TREATMENTS
All items of wood and plywood to be permanently incorporated in the building or structure shall be
preservative treated in a closed retort except as specified for softwood lumber and plywood. Treated
materials which are cut shall have cut surfaces well brush-coated with the preservative used in the
original treatment.
3D Sheet 3 of 5
6. INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS WOOD MEMBERS.
a. Nailers and nailing strips shall be provided as necessary for the attachment of finish materials and
for flush with deck mounting on roof decks.
b. Wood grounds shall be provided as necessary for attachment of trim, finish and other work to
plaster. Ground shall be run in lengths as long as possible, butt jointed and rigidly secured in
place.
7. MISCELLANEOUS
Miscellaneous woodwork items shall be provided in accordance with the following requirements
unless otherwise indicated. The species and grade of wood used in miscellaneous items shall be the
same as specified for the wood finish of the room or spaces in which the miscellaneous items occur.
8. PRIMING.
a. Millwork, except work to receive stain and natural finishes, shall be primed as specified in
b. In addition, before installation, all sides and edges of wood members that will be in contact with
concrete or masonry shall be given a coat of the fire coat material specified in SECTION 3H,
FINISHES.
9. SCHEDULE
a. Schedule of carpentry works shall be as listed below or equivalent approved by the Engineer.
Work Item Wood Material Finishing
1) Door, window and partition Kamper wood. or equal Gloss

frame. enamel painted.
2) Glass door sash. Kamper wood. or equal Painted.
3) Door leaf frame. Kamper wood. or equal Red lead primer.
4) Door leaf finish. Double teak Teak oil.

plywood 4 mm thick.
5) Toilet door leaf finish Plywood 4 mm thick Formica lining.
6) Partition finish. Teak plywood Teak oil.

4 mm thick.
7) Ceiling frame. Kamper wood. Red lead primer.
3D Sheet 4 of 5
8) Ceiling finish. Plywood 6 mm thick Emulsion
painted
9) Ceiling strip. Kamper wood. Gloss enamel

or equal painted.
10) Roof frame. Kamper wood. Residue.

or equal
b. The size of wood material shall be set out and built to the dimensions shown on the Drawings.
c. The detailed application of painting shall comply with the requirements of SECTION 3H,
FINISHES.
3D Sheet 5 of 5
SECTION 3E
MOISTURE PROTECTION
SUB-SECTION 3E-1
BITUMINOUS-MEMBRANE-WATERPROOFING
1. SCOPE
This Section includes bituminous membrane waterproofing work for buildings and related works
2. GENERAL
a. Waterproofing shall be installed where indicated. Waterproofing of floors shall be turned up

around walls for a height of at least 20 cm. Where pipes, conduits or other items pass through the
areas to be waterproofed and where floor drains occur in such areas, the waterproofing shall be
installed after the flashing around these items has been installed. The flashing thus installed shall
be lapped and mopped into the plies of the waterproofing in a manner that will assure a
waterproof joint.
b. The following publication listed below, but referred to thereafter by basic designation only, form
a part of this Specification to the extent indicated by the reference thereto.
D 41 Primer for Use with Asphalt in Damp proofing and Waterproofing.
D 173 Woven Cotton Fabrics Saturated with Bituminous Substances for Use in
Waterproofing.
D 1327 Woven Burlap Fabrics Saturated with Bituminous Substances for Use in
Waterproofing.
JIS A 6005 Asphalt Roofing Felt (Saturated Bituminous Felts).
JIS K 2207 Petroleum Asphalt.
c. The Contractor shall submit, before delivery of any material to the site, the following samples or
descriptive data as specified hereinafter to the Engineer for approval.
1) Three pieces of asphalt-saturated or coal-tar-saturated fabric in size 30 cm by width of roll

sample.
3E-1 Sheet 1 of 3
2) Three pieces of asphalt-saturated or coal-tar-saturated felt in size 30 cm by width of roll
sample.
3. MATERIALS
Materials shall conform to the respective specifications and other requirements specified below.
Materials shall be delivered to the site in sealed containers bearing the manufacturer's original labels.
a. Asphalt : JIS K 2207 or equivalent.
b. Asphalt primer : ASTM D 41 or equivalent.
c. Asphalt-saturated fabrics : ASTM D 173, D 1327 or D 168, or equivalent.
d. Asphalt-saturated felt : JIS A 6005 or equivalent..
4. PREPARATION OF SURFACES
Surfaces to receive waterproofing shall be clean and dry. Holes, joints and cracks shall be pointed
flush with mortar, and high spots shall be cut off or ground smooth. Before waterproofing is applied,
the surfaces to be covered shall be carefully swept to remove dust and foreign matter and shall be
inspected and approved by the Engineer. Surfaces to which asphalt-type waterproofing is to be
applied shall be given a coat of asphalt primer and allowed to dry prior to application of the asphaltic
bitumen.
5. APPLICATION OF WATERPROOFING
The membranes shall be applied at the locations shown and in the manner specified hereinafter. The
membranes shall be applied in a solid mop coat of bitumen, using not less than 14 kg of bitumen for
each 10 sq.m of surface. The bitumen shall be heated to flow freely, but the pitch shall not be heated
above 180C, nor the asphalt above 180C. The membranes shall be applied in the hot bitumen free
from wrinkles or buckles. The entire top surface shall then be given a final mopping, using not less
than 32 kg of pitch, or 27 kg of asphalt, for each 10 sq.m of surface.
a. Fabric membranes shall be used for reinforcing at angles and at other places where the waterproof
membrane may be subjected to unusual strain. Reinforcing shall consist of 2 additional plies of
saturated fabric and alternate mopping of bitumen. Reinforcing strips at angles between floor and
wall shall be of sufficient width to extend at least 15 cm on the floor and 10 cm up the wall.
Strips at vertical corners shall extend at least 13 cm on each side of the corner.
b. Three-ply waterproofing works are completed, inspection shall be performed by the Contractor in
the presence of the Engineer. Where any leakage and defect appears, repair or replacement shall
be provided at no additional cost to the Employer.
3E-1 Sheet 2 of 3
6. INSPECTION
After the Waterproofing works are completed, inspection shall be performed by the Contractor in the
presence of the Engineer. Where any leakage and defect appears, repair or replacement shall be
provided at no additional cost to the Employer.
3E-1 Sheet 3 of 3
SUB-SECTION 3E-2
MORTAR WATERPROOFING
1. SCOPE
This Section includes waterproofing mortar work and related works required under the
Contract.
2. GENERAL
a. Waterproofing mortar work shall be applied as specified hereinafter to those indicated in

the Drawings.
b. The Contractor shall provide all materials, labour, equipment and related items required
to complete the work.
c. The following publications listed below, but referred to thereafter by basic designation
only, from a part of this Specification to the extent indicated by the references thereto.
1. JIS Publication
JIS A 1404 Method of Test for Waterproof Agent of Cement for Concrete
Construction
2. ASTM Publication
d. The Contractor shall furnish certified reports of tests performed by a recognized

independent testing laboratory which indicate that the admixture has been tested and
passed the requirements of JIS A 1404 or equivalent. Certified copies of reports of tests
from approved laboratories performed within the last year on material representative of
that proposed for use in the work will be acceptable.
3. MATERIALS
a. Admixture
Admixture for waterproofing mortar shall be the first quality of products of manufacturer
regularly providing this type of materials
b. Portland cement, fine aggregate and water shall conform to the applicable requirements
for plastering in SECTION 3H, FINISHES
3E-2 Sheet 1 of 2
4. MIXING
Waterproofing mortar shall be mixed in mechanical mixers except where hand-mixing is

approved for small quantities. Each batch shall be proportioned by volume to manufacturer's
recommendation, and accurately measured by manual or mechanical devices.
5. INSTALLATION
The mortar work shall be applied after the base concrete has set and hardened. The finish
shall be floated to a true and even surface, then troweled in a manner that will force the sand
particles down into the waterproofing mortar. With the final toweling, the surface furnished
shall be left smooth and free from rough areas, trowel marks, or other blemishes.
6. CURING
Waterproofing mortar shall be kept moist by sprinkling with water at regular intervals for a
period of at least 3 days, and thereafter shall be protected against rapid drying until properly
and thoroughly cured.
3E-2 Sheet 2 of 2
SUB-SECTION 3E-3
CALKING AND SEALING
1. SCOPE
This Section includes calking and sealing for building works and related works required under the
Contract.
2. GENERAL
a. Calking and joint sealant specified herein are for use in interior and exterior joints, and as where
required.
JIS Publications
JIS A 5751 Oil Based Calking Compounds for Buildings
JIS A 5752 Putty for Metal and Wooden Sash Glazing
JIS A 5755 Silicone Sealing Compound for Buildings
3. MATERIALS
a. Materials shall conform to the respective specifications and other requirements hereinafter
specified.
Calking compounds and sealants shall be delivered to the site in sealed containers labeled to show
the designated name, formula or specification number, lot number, color, date of manufacture,
shelf life, curing time, manufacturer's directions and name of manufacturer.
b. Backup materials shall be one of the following types, that is, closed-cell resilient urethane or
polyvinyl-chloride foam, closed- cell polyethylene beads, polyisobuthylene extrusions, oil less
dry jute. Backup material shall be nonabsorbent, non-staining and shall be compatible with the
sealant used. Tube or rod stock when used shall be rolled into the joint cavity. Performed support
strips for ceramic tile control joint and expansion joint work shall be polyisobuthylene or
polychloroprene rubber.
c. Bond-preventive materials shall be one of the following, as best suited for the application.
1. Polyethylene Tape, Pressure-sensitive Adhesive
The adhesive is required only to hold tape to the construction materials as where required.
3E-3 Sheet 1 of 3
2. Wax paper shall be locally manufactured one or equivalent approved by the Engineer
d. Masking tape shall be locally manufactured one or equivalent approved by the Engineer.
4. SEALANT FORMULATION
a. Intended Application
Each sealant formula brought to the site shall be marked for the intended use. For each intended
use, the color shall be as selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's standard. The sealant
formulation shall be consistent with the desired in service requirements indicated and with the
following requirements for the intended application of electrometric sealants.
1. Normal curing schedules of sealants are acceptable.
2. No staining is a requirement for sealant
3. Color-change requirement is applicable to sealants exposed to view
4. Durability when subjected to ultraviolet radiation is not a requirement for sealants
b. Components of each formula shall be used only with that formula. Intermixing of components of
different formula will not be permitted. Thinners or other additives shall not be used to modify
the formula.
c. Mixing shall be in accordance with instructions provided by the manufacturer of the sealants.
Mixing equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned before mixing each batch.
Prior to delivery of the sealants to the site, a one-cartridge of equivalent representative sample of each
sealant specified herein shall be furnished. The samples shall be accompanied by certified laboratory
test reports showing that the sealants to be furnished have been tested within the last 12 months and
met the requirements of the applicable publications. The sample containers shall include the
information’s on the label such as supplier, name of material, formula or specification number, lot
number, color, date of manufacture, mixing instructions, life expectancy of the application, and
curing time.
a. The joint design, shape and spacing shall be as indicated for the desired service requirements.
b. The surface of joints to be sealed with calking compound shall be cleaned of particles or mortar,
dust and other foreign matter, and shall be brushed out just prior to calking.
c. Concrete and masonry surface in contact with sealant shall be dry, sound and well brushed and
wiped dust free. Oil or grease shall be removed with solvents, and surfaces shall be wiped with
3E-3 Sheet 2 of 3
clean rags. Where surfaces have been treated, curing compounds, oil or other such materials shall
be removed by sandblasting or wire brushing. Laitance and mortar shall be removed from the
joint cavity. Where a backstop is required, backup material shall be inserted in the joint cavity to
the required depth.
d. Steel surface to be in contact with sealant shall be sandblasted or, if sandblasting would not be
practical or would damage adjacent finished work, the metal shall be scraped and wire-brushed to
remove loose mill scale. Dirt, oil or grease shall be removed by solvent cleaning, and surfaces
shall be wiped with clean cloths. Protective coatings on steel surfaces shall be removed be
sandblasting or by a solvent that leaves no residue.
e. Aluminum surfaces of door frame in contact with sealants shall be cleaned of temporary
protective coatings, dirt, oil and grease. When making tape is used for a protective cover, the tape
shall be removed just prior to applying the sealant. Solvents used to remove protective coatings
shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the aluminum work, and shall be no staining.
f. Bond-preventive materials shall be installed on the bottom of the joint cavity and other surfaces
indicated to prevent the sealant from adhering. The material shall be carefully applied so as to
avoid contamination of adjoining surfaces or breaking bond with surfaces other than those
indicated.
7. APPLICATION
a. Compound shall be gun-applied with a nozzle of proper size to fit the width of joint indicated,
and shall be forced into groove with sufficient pressure to fill the groove solidly. Calking shall be
uniformly smooth and free of wrinkles, and shall be left sufficiently convex to result in a flush
joint when dry. One coat of sealer shall be applied over joint after compound has dried
sufficiently to develop a surface skin so as not to deform the surface of the joint.
b. Primer shall be used on concrete masonry units, wood or other porous surfaces in accordance
with instructions furnished with the sealant.
c. Paper masking tape shall be placed on the finished surface on one or both sides of a joint cavity to
protect adjacent finished surfaces from compound smears. Masking tape shall be removed within
10 minutes after joint has been filled and tooled.
d. Joints shall be tooled slightly concave after sealant is installed. When tooling white or light-color
sealant, dry or water wet tool shall be used.
8. CLEANING
The surfaces adjoining the calked and sealed joints shall be cleaned or smears or other soiling
resulting from the calking and sealing application.
3E-3 Sheet 3 of 3
SUB-SECTION 3E-4
FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING
1. SCOPE
Scope This section, includes fluid applied waterproofing and related works the required under
the Contract.
1.1 GENERAL
A. Work included :
1. Preparation of surface to be applied
2. Provision and application of fluid applied waterproofing on following locations :
3. All tools and accessories required for application
4. Installation of shop drawing
B. Related Sections :
Cast-In-Place Concrete
C. The following publications listed below, but referred to thereafter by basic designation only,
from a part of this Specification to the extent indicated by the references thereto.
ASTM C 836 - 81 Adhesion Strength
ASTM D 412 - 80 Tensile Strength
ASTM D 624 - 78 Tear Resistance
D. The Contractor shall furnish certified reports of tests performed by a recognized independent
testing laboratory which indicate that the admixture has been tested and passed the
requirements of JIS A 1404 or equivalent. Certified copies of reports of tests from approved
laboratories performed within the last year on material representative of that proposed for
use in the work will be acceptable.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data : Submit manufacturer’s technical literature, including mixture and additives.
3E-4 Sheet 1 of 4
B. Qualification Data : Submit applicator qualifications verifying years of experience; include
list of completed projects having similar scope of work identified by name, location, date,
contact person and address.
C. Manufacturer’s Instruction : Submit manufacturer’s printed installation instructions,

including proportion and mixing requirements.
D. Warranty : Submit warranties from manufacturer and installer.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Applicator Qualification
1. Company specializing in application of fluid applied waterproofing systems.

2. Minimum 3 years documented experience.
1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Conduct pre-installation conference.
B. Require attendance of manufacturer’s representative, applicator, and related trades which

interface with systems.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, handle and protect products.
1.6 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Do not attempt installation of waterproofing mixture against active flow of water without
taking manufacturer’s special precautions and preparations for plugging flow.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Guarantee products and materials to be free of defects for 10 years from date of Substantial
Completion of project.
B. Guarantee installed system to be free of leaks and defects in workmanship for 10 years from
date of Substantial Completion of project.
3E-4 Sheet 2 of 4
2. MATERIALS
A. Cleamer, primer and accessory materials : Types and compositions recommended by

manufacturer.
B. Water : Clean and potable.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces for conditions that would adversely affect execution. Do not proceed until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning of execution will constitute acceptance of
existing conditions.
B. Verify that substrates have thoroughly cured and are free of efflorescence, oil, grease,
laitance, loose particles, and foreign contaminates.
C. Verify that items penetrating waterproofing system are securely installed.
D. Locate areas of active leaks and take special procedure recommended by water-proofing
manufacturer.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions.
B. Mechanically roughen smooth substrates to “medium” sandpaper profile.
C. Remove form ties to 18 mm minimum behind face of wall. Remove sharp projections,
protusions, fins, and loose materials.
D. Fill holes, voids and honeycombs areas flush with patching grout recommended by
waterproofing manufacturer.
E. Clean, scrape, route-out substrate, and pack grout around drains, pipes, conduit and other
items penetrating waterproofing surfaces and seal according to manufacturer’s instructions.
F. Treat cracks and joints with materials and procedures recommended by waterproofing
manufacturer. Stop flow of water through cracks and joints with plugging grout. Before
applying water proofing contractor shall conduct leakage test as follows :
- Leakage Test 1 : - a Fill ground water reservoir full with water, within 2 x 24
hours decrease of water table will be measured,
3E-4 Sheet 3 of 4
- b If the water table decrease more than 50 cm, contractor
should stop water flow by plugging grout.
- Leakage Test 2 : - c Same procedure will be applied in this second test
- d If the water table decrease more than 50 cm, contractor

should grout the leakage.
- e If the water table decrease less than 50 cm, contractor shell

proceed to apply water proofly.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply products using skilled workmen in accordance with manufacturer’s printed

instructions. Use recommended techniques, procedures, and equipment.
B. Dampen substrate with clean water.
C. Apply waterproofing slurry mixture in minimum of 2 of coats and at rate to produce

thickness required by manufacturer. Allow 24 hours minimum between application of coats.
Wet down previous coat prior to application of next coat.
D. If a water test is to be run, membrane should cure a minimum of 36 hours.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Thickness Tests : Continually monitor installation thickness to verify minimum thickness are
being achieved. In deficient areas additional materials to produce required thickness.
3E-4 Sheet 4 of 4
SUB-SECTION 3F-2
STEEL PLATE DOORS
1. SCOPE
a. This Section includes fabrication and erection of steel plate doors for buildings and related works
b. References
SECTION 3B, METAL WORK
2. GENERAL
a. Steel plate doors shall be of type, thickness, nominal size and design shown on the Drawings.
Doors shall be completed with frames, canopies, tracks, brackets, hangers, guides, channels,
bolts, stop floors, stop walls, handles, catch and padlock.
b. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings of steel plate doors to the Engineer for approval. Shop
drawings shall indicate location and elevation of each door, and shall show type and location of
hardware, details of construction including anchorage, and methods of assembly.
c. One complete, full size sample of door proposed for use shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval. The sample shall be installed in the work and completed with hardware, anchors and
other accessories.
3. MATERIALS AND INSTALLATION
Materials and installation procedures shall conform to the applicable requirements of SECTION 3B,
METAL WORK.
4. STORAGE
The material shall be stored out of contact with the ground in such manner and locations as will
minimize contaminations and deterioration thereon.
5. PAINTING
Painting shall conform to the applicable requirements of SECTION 3H, FINISHES.
3F-2 Sheet 1 of 1
SUB-SECTION 3F-3
METAL LOUVERS
1. SCOPE
a. This Section includes fabrication and erection of metal louvers and louver frames for buildings,
and related works required under the Contract.
b. References
2. GENERAL
a. Metal louvers and frames at locations indicated shall be of type, size and design shown on the
Drawings.
b. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings showing details of various parts and members of
metal louvers and frames, method of erection and any other pertinent details to the Engineer for
approval. No materials shall be delivered to the site prior to approval of the Engineer on these
shop drawings.
c. The following publications listed below, but referred to thereafter by basic designation only, form
A 123 Zinc (Hot-galvanized) Coating on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed and
Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips.
A 153 Zinc Coating (Hot-dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
2) JIS Publication
JIS G 3101 Rolled Steel for General Structure
3. MATERIALS
a. All blades and frames shall be of galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A 123 or equivalent.
b. Finishing color shall be as directed by the Engineer.
3F-3 Sheet 1 of 2
4. STORAGE
Materials shall be stored out of contact with the ground under the coverings as will minimize
contamination, deterioration and damage thereupon.
5. INSTALLATION
a. Metal louvers shall be of fixed blade continuous steel sheet galvanized and colored as specified,
and supported by galvanized steel frames.
b. Steel frames shall be fixed plumb, true and in alignment to the adjacent structural members or
masonry walls using anchors or other approved method as shown on the shop drawings.
c. The external face of each blade shall be bolted back to the frame using polypropylene spacing
ferrules.
d. Voids between frames and the adjacent structural members or masonry walls shall be sealed in
accordance with SECTION 3E, MOISTURE PROTECTION.
e. After installation, frames and louvers shall be thoroughly cleaned and damaged surfaces shall be
repaired in accordance with SECTION 3H, FINISHES or as directed by the Engineer.
3F-3 Sheet 2 of 2
SUB-SECTION 3F-4
BUILDER'S HARDWARE
1. SCOPE
This Section includes all materials and erection of builder's hardware for buildings and related works
2. GENERAL
a. Hardware shall be applied as specified hereinafter to those places indicated in door and window
schedules. Reinforcement for hardware in metal doors shall be as specified in Sub-Section 3F-2
and 3F-3 herein before. Modifications to hardware required by reason of construction
characteristics shall be such as to provide the specified operative of functional features.
JIS Publications
A 5501 Wrought Steel and Wrought Stainless Steel Butt Hinges
A 5502 Wrought Steel and Wrought Stainless Steel Spring Hinges
3. MATERIALS
Except as hereinafter specified, hardware shall be manufacturer's first quality items approved by the
Engineer.
a. Fastenings
Fastening of proper type, size, quantity and finish shall be supplied with each article of hardware.
Machine screws and expansion shields shall be used for attaching hardware to concrete or brick.
Fastenings exposed to the weather in the finished work shall be of brass, bronze or stainless steel
as applicable. Bolts, where used on reverse-bevel exterior doors equipped with half-surface of
full-surface hinges, shall employ one-way screws or other approved tamperproof screws. Screws
for the jamb leaf of half-surface, half-mortise and full-surface hinges attached to structural steel
frames shall be the one-way type or other approved tamperproof type.
b. Keying
1. Cylinder lock shall be keyed in sets or subsets as directed by the Engineer. Keys shall be
supplied in 3 change keys each of cylinder lock and 3 key each of master keyed sets.
3F-4 Sheet 1 of 4
2. The keys shall be turned over to the Engineer properly tagged and designated as to location
and arranged in a container in sets or subsets as scheduled, for ease in setting up the system in
the key cabinet.
c. Locksets and Latch sets
1. Manufacture
The locksets, latch sets and deadlocks shall be the products of a single manufacturer.
2. Cylinder Locks
Cylinder shall have five pins.
3. Fronts
Mortise-type locks and latches for doors 45 mm thick and over shall standard-bevel front.
Lock front for double acting doors shall be rounded. Mortise locks shall have armored fronts
where used in conjunction with fire-exit bolts.
d. Butts and Hinges
Butt sizes shall be not less than 120 x 120 mm, or larger where required. Butt widths shall be
selected for door face to clear trim projection when door swings open 180 degrees. 35 mm long
screws shall be provided for butts at wood doors. Base materials of butt are bronze or stainless
steel as required for finish.
e. Door Closing Devices
Closers shall be provided with a clock-key or capped valve. Size requirements shall conform to
manufacturer's standards as applicable to closer type, door size and function required. Closers for
out swinging exterior doors shall have standard or long parallel arms as required for the particular
opening. Closers for interior doors that are within 125 mm of a partition shall have standard
parallel arms. Surface type closers shall be products of one manufacturer only.
f. Metal Thresholds
Thresholds shall have cutouts for doors hung on pivots with integral or applied stops and shall be
galvanized steel. Each unit shall be in single length only for each opening, and ends shall be
shaped to suit to jamb profiles.
g. Sliding Door's Hardware
Hangers and rollers for sliding door shall be provided in sufficient number and strength based on
the sizes and weights of the respective doors. Rails shall be in single length for each door and
have stoppers at the ends to absorb the impact of the door opening and closing operation.
3F-4 Sheet 2 of 4
4. SAMPLES
a. Sample List
1. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a samples list in accordance with the
Engineer's instructions listing each of the different articles of builder's hardware required.
2. The hardware schedule shall list all of the materials to be furnished and shall be submitted to
the Engineer for approval before any hardware is delivered to the site. The schedule shall
include the quantities, manufacturer's catalogue numbers, detailed information and location of
hardware set, identification, keying information, list of abbreviations and template numbers.
b. Sample and Schedule
A sample of each of the different articles of hardware, properly tagged and marked for
identification, shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Following approval of the
samples, a schedule showing the quantities, types, catalogue numbers and locations of the various
article of builders and locations of the various article of builder's hardware required shall be
delivered to the Engineer.
5. PACKING, MARKING AND LABELING
Hardware shall be delivered to the site in the manufacturer's original packages. Each article of
hardware shall be individually packaged in the manufacturer's substantial commercial carton or
container, properly marked or labeled so as to be readily identifiable with the permanent hardware
schedule. Each change-key shall be tagged or otherwise identified with the door for which its cylinder
is intended.
6. TEMPLATES
The Contractor shall furnish templates required by the manufacturer of the doors, windows, louvers
and the frames so as to enable the manufacturer to make proper provision in his work to receive the
specified hardware and deliver his products to site on schedule. Where two or more articles of
hardware are to be mounted on the same door, window and louver, the Contractor shall effect proper
coordination between the manufacturers of the different articles in order that each manufacturer may
furnish templates that will allow installation of his hardware without interference with the installation
and operation of other hardware.
7. APPLICATION
a. Armor plates shall be installed on the push side of single-acting doors and on both sides of
double-acting doors.
b. Butts and Hinges
1. Top hinge shall be installed with the center of hinge not more than 28 cm below the top of
door.
3F-4 Sheet 3 of 4
2. Bottom hinge shall be installed with the center of hinge not more than 33 cm above the
finished floor.
3. Intermediate hinges or pivot shall be installed equidistant between the top and bottom hinges
or pivots.
c. Door closing devices shall be installed and adjusted in strict accordance with the templates and
printed instructions supplied by the manufacturer of the devices. Insofar as practicable, doors
opening to or from halls and corridors shall have the closer mounted on the room side of the
door.
d. Door Pulls, Sectional
Pull shall be centered 100 cm above finished floor
e. Door pulls on plates shall be centered above the finished door
f. Locks, Latches and Strikes
The location of strikes for locks and latches shall be as follows
1. Mortise deadlock strike shall be centered 100 cm above the finished floor
2. Knob lock latch strikes shall be centered 100 cm above the finished floor.
g. Push plates shall be installed with the center of plate 120 cm above the finished floor.
8. FINISHING
Finishing of hardware shall be applied as specified in door and window schedules.
3F-4 Sheet 4 of 4
SUB-SECTION 3F-5
GLASS AND GLAZING
1. SCOPE
This Section includes all fabrication and erection of glass and glazing work for buildings and related
works required under the Contract.
2. GENERAL
a. Glass and glazing work shall be applied as specified hereinafter to those areas indicated in the
Drawings. The Contractor shall provide all materials, labour, equipment and related items
required to complete this work.
1. JIS Publications
A 5755 Silicone Sealing Compounds for Buildings

A 5756 Flexible Polyvinyl Chloride Glazing Gaskets for Buildings
R 3103 Method of Test for Strain Point of Glass
R 3201 Sheet Glass
2. US Commercial Standards
CS 230 Vinyl Plastic Weather-strip
3. Flat Glass Marketing Associations (FGMA) Publications
Glazing Manual
c. Submittals
1. Samples
The Contractor shall submit 25 x 30 cm glass samples, factory labeled, of each type of
glasses for approval of the Engineer before work is started.
2. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions
Manufacturer's printed installation instructions for glass- setting materials shall be submitted
for approval of the Engineer before work is started.
3F-5 Sheet 1 of 3
3. Certificates of Conformance or Compliance
Unless otherwise specified, before delivery of materials, the Contractor shall submit notarized
certificates from the manufacturer certifying that materials conform to requirements specified
herein. Labels or marking affixed to manufacturer's products attesting that identical products
have successfully passed requirements specified herein will be accepted in lieu of certificates.
3. MATERIALS
a. Glass
Glass shall be provided in locations indicated or specified. Glass for doors shall not be less than 5
mm thick, unless indicated or specified otherwise. Sheet glass conforming to JIS R 3201 class A
or equivalent shall be provided for glassing openings not indicated or specified otherwise.
b. Setting Materials
1. Glassing compound and performed glazing sealants shall be of suitable type approved for the
application and in accordance with the requirements herein or those in FGMA "Glazing
Manual", unless otherwise specified. The use of non skinning compound, non resilient-type
performed sealers and performed impregnated- type gaskets will not be permitted. Metal sash
putty will not be permitted, but compound conforming to JIS A 5755 will be permitted. When
flexible vinyl gasket channels are used, the material shall conform to JIS A 5756. Other
materials which will be exposed to view and unpainted shall be gray or neutral color.
2. As required to supplement the accessories provided with the items to be glazed and to provide
a complete installation including glazing points, clips, shims, angles and beads, setting
materials posed in the finished work shall have a finish that will not corrode or stain while in
service.
Putty and glazing compounds shall be delivered to the site in unopened containers, labeled plainly
with the manufacturer's names and brands. Glass and setting materials shall be stored in safe, dry
locations and shall not be unpacked until needed for installation. Handling and installation of
materials shall be in a manner that will protect them from damage.
5. INSTALLATION
a. The sizes to provide the required edge clearances shall be determined by measuring the actual
opening to receive the glass. All edges of glass that will be exposed in finish work shall be
ground smooth. Labels shall be left in place until the installation is approved. Movable items shall
be securely fixed, or in a closed and locked position until glazing compound has thoroughly set.
3F-5 Sheet 2 of 3
b. Glass Setting
1. Items to be glazed may be shop or filed glazed using glass of the quality and thickness
specified or indicated. Preparation of surrounds and glazing, unless otherwise specified or
approved, shall be in conformance with the details and general conditions in the FGMA
"Glazing Manual".
2. Wood windows and wood doors may be glazed in conformance with one of the glazing
methods described in the standards under which they are produced. Glass for which the
manufacturer's printed installation instructions are submitted and approved as specified shall
be handled and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Beads or stops
which are furnished with the items to be glazed shall be used to secure the glass in place.
c. Sheet glass shall be cut and set with the visible lines or waves running with horizontal
dimensions.
d. Cleaning
Glass surface shall be thoroughly cleaned with labels, paint spots, putty and other defacement
removed and shall be clean at the time the work is accepted.
3F-5 Sheet 3 of 3
SUB - SECTION 3F-6
SIGN BOARDS & LOCAL ORNAMENTATION
1. SCOPE
a. This Section includes all materials and installation of interior sign boards & Local
Ornamentation for passenger terminal building, and related works required under the
Contract.
b. References
2. GENERAL
a. Interior sign boards & local ornamentation shall be of type, size, letterings, colors, design and
installed locations shown on the Drawings and approved shop drawings.
b. The Contractor shall comply with the following publication for the preparation and the
installation of the sign boards & local ornamentation, and other related works specified
herein.
"STANDARISASI TERMINAL PENUMPANG PELABUHAN LAUT"
Published by
DEPARTEMEN PERHUBUNGAN, DIREKTORAT JENDERAL

PERHUBUNGAN LAUT, DIREKTORAT PELABUHAN DAN
PENGERUKAN, JAKARTA 1993.
c. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings showing details of qualities of materials, layout of
letters, colors and installation details such as support fragments, fixing and others required
for the completion of the works for the approval of the Engineer.
d. The contractor shall prepare spaces as indicated in the drawing for local ornamentation.
3. MATERIALS
Panels of sign board & local ornamentation shall be made of translucent 5 mm acrylic sheet.
Letters and symbols shall be presented with screen printed materials or by other approved means
on the acrylic panels. Surface of the sign boards & local ornamentation shall be coated with clear
lacquer.
3F-6 Sheet 1 of 2
4. LETTERS AND SYMBOLS
All letters and symbols shall be well formed in accurate shapes, proportions and colors
5. INSTALLATION
Installation of sign boards & local ornamentation shall be executed in accordance with the
approved shop drawings and applicable requirements of SUB-SECTION 3B-5,
MISCELLANEOUS METAL WORK.
3F-6 Sheet 2 of 2
SUB-SECTION 3G
GUTTER AND LEADER
1. SCOPE
a. This Section includes roof gutter and leader for buildings and related works required under
the Contract.
b. Reference
2. GENERAL
a. Roof gutter and leader shall be installed as indicated in the Drawings and approved shop
drawings, manufacturer’s printed specifications and installation instructions.
b. Related metal work such as flashing and the like shall comply with the applicable
requirements of SECTION 3B, METAL WORK.
c. The Contractor shall be responsible for any errors of detailing and fabrication and for the
correct fitting of gutter and leader as shown on the approved shop drawings.
d. The following publications listed below, but referred to thereafter by basic designation only,
A 123 Zinc (Hot-galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed

and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips.
A 153 Zinc Coating (Hot-dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
2) BS Publications
BS 729 Hot-dipped Galvanized Coatings on Iron and Steel Articles
BS 2989 Hot-dipped Galvanized Plain Steel Sheet and Coil
3) As Publication
AS 1214 Hot-dipped Galvanized Coatings on Threaded Fastener
e. Shop Drawings
The Contractor shall submit shop drawings showing complete details of layout, erection and
installation of gutter and leader to the Engineer for approval. Details shall show weight, gages
or thickness, jointing, expansion joint spacing and procedure to be followed during
installation of gutter and leader. No materials shall be delivered to the site until these shop
drawings have been approved by the Engineer.
3G Sheet 1 of 2
3. MATERIALS
a. Metal sheet materials and metal accessories such as clamps, fasteners and screws shall be of
galvanized steel conforming to the applicable requirements of SECTION 3B, METAL
WORK.
b. Leader shall be made of AW type polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or of galvanized steel of

thickness and diameter and at locations shown in the Drawings.
4. INSTALLATION
Gutters and leaders shall be installed accurately in accordance with the manufacturer's installation
instructions, specifications and shop drawings. Highly skilled and experienced foremen shall be
engaged in the work. Care shall be taken during installation that dirt, surplus materials or any
other obstacles which will affect sufficient working of gutter and leader shall not be accumulated
on or in gutter and leader.
5. INSPECTION
After the all work's are completed, inspection shall be performed by the Contractor in the
presence of the Engineer at such time on rainy day as the Engineer may direct. Any defective
works found during the inspection shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor as directed by
the Engineer with no additional cost to the Employer.
3G Sheet 2 of 2
SECTION 3H
FINISHES
SUB-SECTION 3H-1
PLASTERING
1. SCOPE
This Section includes plastering work for buildings and related work required under the Contract.
2. GENERAL
a. Portland cement plaster included herein shall be applied as specified hereinafter to areas
indicated in the finish schedule of the Drawings.
b. Walls shall include vertical surfaces including surrounds of openings and recesses.
c. The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, scaffoldings, coverings, equipment, tools,
implements and incidentals, required to carry out the plaster work.
d. The Contractor shall make good any defects to the satisfaction of the Engineer and shall clear
away and clean up any splashes, dripping, etc., upon completion.
e. The following publications listed below, but referred to thereafter by basic designation only,
form a part of this Specification to the extent indicated by the reference thereto.
A 6904 Gypsum Plaster.
C 29 Unit Weight of Aggregate.
C 35 Inorganic Aggregates for Use in Gypsum Plaster.
3) NI Publications
f. Submittals
1) Before commencing application of plastering, the Contractor shall submit sufficiently in

advance of need to allow the Engineer for review and approval, the material list, samples
and shop drawings required herein.
2) A list of materials to be incorporated in the work shall be submitted and shall include
descriptive data, catalogue cuts, and other such information required to identify the
3H-1 Sheet 1 of 5
materials as to the locations of their use in the work. No consideration will be given by
the Engineer to partial lists submitted from time to time.
3) Certified copies of test reports from approved laboratories performed within the past year
on material representative of that proposed to use in the work shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval.
3. MATERIALS
Portland cement plaster shall be a mixture of Portland cement and aggregate as specified
hereunder. Materials shall conform to the respective specifications and other requirements
specified.
a. Aggregate
The unit weight of aggregate shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C 29, or
equivalent. Aggregates shall conform to ASTM C 35 or equivalent, except the gradation of
natural or manufactured sand shall be as follows.
Sand percentage of weight

retained on each sieve
Sieve size Maximum Minimum
4 0 -
8 8 2
16 38 22
30 78 52
50 97 65
100 100 97
b. Portland Cement
Cement shall conform to ASTM C 150 or NI-8, type I, or approved equivalent. Only one type
and brand of cement shall be used in the work.
c. Water
Water shall be clean, fresh, potable and free from injurious amount of oils, acids, alkalis and
organic matter injurious to the plaster.
Sampling and testing of materials proposed to be used in the work shall be done by an approved
testing laboratory prior to the delivery of materials to the site at the expense of the contractor.
Materials shall be tested as prescribed in the applicable specifications under which they are
furnished.
3H-1 Sheet 2 of 5
Manufactured materials shall be delivered to the site in the original packages containers and
bundles bearing the name of the manufacturer and the brand name. Portland cement shall be
stored off the ground under water tight cover and away from sweating walls and other damp
surface until ready for use. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from the site.
6. PLASTER THICKNESS AND SURFACE EVENNESS
a. Plaster thickness and surface evenness shall be controlled by grounds or screeds of metal,
wood or plaster. Plaster shall be finished to a true and even surface well within limits
established by the best trade practice. Plaster thickness from the face of the plaster base to the
finished plaster surface shall be as follows.
Plaster base Thickness of plaster
Masonry unit walls 15 mm minimum
Concrete walls 15 mm minimum
b. Metal grounds shall be furnished as required for securing trim items and providing finished
corners and terminations. Temporary screeds shall be installed when permanent screeds or
grounds cannot be used. On completion of approved base coats, temporary screeds shall be
removed and resultant voids shall be immediately filled with plaster.
c. Plaster screeds shall be used within the plastered areas to supplement wood and metal grounds
and screeds.
7. PREPARATION OF PLASTER RECEIVING SURFACES
a. Base for plaster shall be inspected and approved prior to plastering. Grounds shall be true to
lines and elevations, and securely fastened. Plastering shall not be started until windows are
glazed and exterior doors are installed unless openings are temporarily closed with plastic
sheeting or cheese-cloth. Natural ventilation shall be provided to remove excess moisture
from plaster and exhaust the moisture outside the building.
b. Concrete and masonry unit surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and free of paint,
efflorescence, oil, grease, acids, and loose or foreign matter prior to application of plaster.
Smooth concrete Portland cement grout prior to application of plaster finish.
8. MIXING
Plaster shall be mixed in mechanical mixers except where hand mixing is approved by the
Engineer for small quantities of plastering. Caked or lumped material shall not be used. Each
batch shall be proportioned by volume, accurately measured by manual or mechanical devices,
and thoroughly mixed the minimum amount of water until uniform in color and consistency.
Repapering will not be permitted, and plaster that has begun to set shall be discarded.
3H-1 Sheet 3 of 5
9. BASE COAT
a. Proportion
The base coat for plaster finish for two-coat work and the scratch and brown coats for three-
coat work shall be mixed to the proportion of one part Portland cement to four parts sand by
volume.
b. Application
1. Unless otherwise indicated, two-coat work shall be applied for plastering on masonry
units and concrete wall surfaces. Base coat shall be carried to the wall and flow, with
spaces between grounds filled flush with grounds. Plaster for external and internal corners
shall be applied with round smooth finish. Suction of dry porous materials, including
plaster, shall be reduced by slightly moistening just prior to plastering.
2. The base coat shall be a scratch coat doubled back, applied with sufficient material and
pressure to form full bond on the masonry units and concrete surfaces. The doubled-back
coat shall bring the plaster out to grounds and shall be rodded and derbies to a true
surface. The surface shall be left but rough to from a bond for the finish coat.
10. FINISH COAT
a. Proportion
The finish coat for plaster finish shall be mixed to the proportion of one part Portland cement
to four parts sand by volume.
b. Application
1. The finish coat shall be applied over a partially dry case coat in accordance with the best
trade practice for the type of base plaster and as approved. The finish coat shall be
omitted back of projecting bases, wainscots, fixed equipment and other locations where
indicated. Finish coat shall not be applied above wainscots until wainscots have been
installed.
2. Finish coat shall be applied after the brown coat has set and hardened, and not less than
24 hours after application of the brown coat. The finish coat shall be floated to a true and
even surface, then toweled in a manner that will force the sand particles down into the
plaster and with the final toweling, and leave the surface finished smooth and free from
rough areas, trowel marks, checks, or other blemishes.
The finish coat shall be kept moist with a fog spray for at least 2 days, and thereafter shall
be protected against rapid drying until properly and thoroughly cured.
11. CURING
Plaster shall be kept moist by sprinkling with water at regular intervals for a period of at least 3
day and until no powdery particles are present to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3H-1 Sheet 4 of 5
12. PATCHING
Plaster showing over sanding, crack, blisters, pits, checks or discoloration will not be acceptable.
Such plaster shall be removed and replaced with new plaster at the expense of the Contractor.
Patching of defective work will be permitted only when approved by the Engineer, and such
patching shall match to the existing work in texture and color.
13. RENDERING
a. Portland cement rendering which is a mixture of only the Portland cement and water shall be
applied where indicated or approved by the Engineer.
b. Materials and workmanship for rendering shall comply with the applicable requirements for
plastering specified herein.
14. Samples of completed work may be taken by the Engineer at any time for laboratory inspection
and test to determine conformance of the work.
3H-1 Sheet 5 of 5
SUB-SECTION 3H-2
CERAMIC TILE
1. SCOPE
This Section includes all material and installation of ceramic tile for buildings and related works
2. GENERAL
a. Tile in colors and patterns shall be applied in the areas shown on the Drawings. Floor tile
installation shall not be commenced in areas requiring wall tile until the wall tile has been
installed.
b. Tile shall be installed with the respective surfaces in true and even plans to the elevations and
grades shown on the Drawings. Each tile shall be brought to true and level plane by use of
beating block, and a test of place distortion shall be made with a straight edge.
c. Tile shall be laid from the centerlines of each space outward and adjustments shall be made
on a long walls, partitions and borders, if any, so as to symmetries the pattern with no cuts
less than one- half of the tile width.
d. Joints between tiles shall be of uniform width as specified for the tile installed and parallel
over the entire area. Fractional changes in dimensions without varying the uniformity of joint
width will be permitted.
e. Tile shall be cut with a suitable cutting tool and rough edges shall be rubbed smooth. Cut-tile
misfits shall be replaced with properly cut line.
f. Installation of tile shall be deferred until hangers, door bucks, and electrical and mechanical
work that are to be in or behind tile have been installed and satisfactory protection of
adjoining work has been provided.
g. Stops, returns, trimmers, caps and special shapes shall be provided as required for sills, jambs,
recesses, offsets, external corners, and other conditions to provide a complete and neatly
finished installation. Tile bases or cove shall be solidly backed with mortar.
h. The following publication listed below, but referred to thereafter by basic designation only,
1) ANSI Publications.
A 118.1 Dry-set Portland Cement Mortar.
A 137.1 Ceramic Tile.
3H-2 Sheet 1 of 5
C 33 Concrete Aggregate.
C 144 Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
C 150 Portland Cement.
C 206 Special Finishing Hydrated Lime.
C 207 Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
C 279 Chemical Resistant Masonry Units.
C 307 Tensile strength of Chemical Resistant Resin Mortars.
C 321 Bond Strength of Chemical Resistant Mortars.
3) JIS Publication.
JIS A 5209 Ceramic Tile.
4) NI Publications.
i. The Contractor shall furnish test reports of materials to be used for the work prior to delivery
of materials to the site. Test reports signed by the Contractor and an authorized officer of the
manufacturer shall certify that materials shall be duly in compliance with the Specification,
bearing the name and address of the Contractor, the project location, the quantity and date or
dates of the applicable shipment or delivery.
3. MATERIALS
a. Aggregate for concrete fills shall conform to ASTM C 33 or equivalent. Maximum size of
coarse aggregate shall not be greater than one-half of the thickness of concrete fill.
b. Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C 150 or NI-8, type I.
c. Sand for setting bed shall conform to ASTM C 144 or equivalent. Sand for grout shall
conform to ASTM C 144 or NI-3, except 100 percent of sand shall pass the No.16 sieve size.
d. Tile shall conform to ANSI A 137.1 or equivalent and shall be of standard grade. Container
shall be standard grade-sealed. Sizes specified are nominal.
1) Ceramic tile shall be matted glaze and to be applied as indicated in the Drawings.
2) Non slip ceramic tile shall be installed on the edge side of stairs floor.
3) Trim units shall be of type, size and shape as indicated in the Drawings.
3H-2 Sheet 2 of 5
4. SAMPLES
The following samples of materials proposed for use shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval before materials represented by the samples are delivered to the site.
a. Floor tile : Duplicate sheets of tile, each approx. 300 x 300 mm, showing colors and
patterns of each type, class and form.
b. Wall tile : Duplicate panels of 4 tiles each, showing range in shades of each color.
c. Trimmers : Duplicate pieces of each color and shape.
d. Accessories : One of each color, type and style.
5. INSTALLATION OF WALL TILE
a. Scratch coats for application as foundation coats shall not be less than 6 mm thick and shall
be composed by volume of one part portland cement to four parts damp sand and mixed with
the minimum amount of water necessary to produce a workability. Mortar for scratch coats
shall be used within one hour after mixing. Retampering shall not be permitted. Scratch coats
shall be applied in sufficient quantity and with sufficient pressure to cover the entire area and
to form good keys, and shall be deeply scored or scratched and cross-scratched. Scratch coats
shall be kept moist and an interval of at least 48 hours shall be provided between application
of scratch coats and subsequent coats.
b. Mortar bed shall be composed by volume of one part portland cement to four parts damp
sand, and mixed with the minimum amount of water necessary to produce a workability.
Mortar bed shall be applied in sufficient quantity and with sufficient pressure to cover well
the entire area and form a good keys, and shall be brought out flush with temporary screeds or
guide strips so places as to give a true face of tile and shall have a finish suitable for receiving
materials used in setting tile.
c. Joints shall be straight, level, perpendicular and of even width not exceeding 16 mm,
Wainscots shall be built of full courses, that may extend to a greater height but in no case
lower than the height shown on the Drawings. Vertical joints shall be maintained plumb for
the entire height of the tile work. Damaged or defective tile shall be replaced.
d. Tile set by the conventional method shall have the edges wetted and shall be grouted full with
a plastic mix of neat, white portland cement immediately after a suitable area of tile has been
set. Tile set in dry-set mortar shall be grouted with a white dry-tile grout mixed and applied in
strict accordance with the grout manufacturer's instructions. The joints shall be tooled slightly
concave and the excess mortar joints after the grout has been cleaned from the surface shall be
roughened at once and filled to the spring line of the cushion edge before the mortar begins to
harden.
e. Tile accessories shall be installed in the positions indicated in the Drawings or where directed
by the Engineer.
3H-2 Sheet 3 of 5
6. INSTALLATION OF FLOOR TILE
a. Concrete fill shall be provided under the setting bed where the distance between the under-
floor surface and the finished tile-floor surface is 50 mm or greater, and shall be of such
thickness that the mortar setting bed to be placed over the concrete fill shall not be less than
19 mm nor, more than 32 mm thick at any point. Water-proofing under concrete fill shall
conform to the requirements of SECTION 3E, MOISTURE PROTECTION. Where
waterproof underpayments does not occur, structural slab shall be saturated with water but no
free water shall be allowed to remain on the slab surface immediately prior to installation of
fill thereon. Concrete fill shall be composed by volume of one part portland cement to three
parts fine aggregate to four parts coarse aggregate and mixed with water to produce as dry a
consistency as practicable. The fill shall be spread, tamped and screened to a true plane and
pit-shed to drains or leveled as shown on the Drawings. Concrete fill shall be reinforced with
one layer of reinforce, with the uncut edges lapped the width of one mesh and the cut ends
and edges lapped not less than 50 mm. Laps shall be tied together with 18 gage wire every 25
cm along the finished edges and every 15 cm along the cut ends and edges. The reinforcement
shall be supported and secured in the centers of concrete fills. The mesh shall be continuous.
b. Setting bed shall be composed by volume of one part portland cement to four parts damp
sand, and mixed with the minimum amount of water necessary to produce a workability. Area
of setting bed spread at one time shall be only as large as can be covered with tile before the
mortar shall be removed. Setting beds shall be spread and tamped to force out air pockets,
screened to a true plane and sloped to drains or leveled as shown on the Drawings. The
average thickness of setting bed in any area shall be 25 mm but in no case shall setting beds
be less than 19 mm or more than 32 mm thick. Setting bed shall be reinforced as previously
specified for setting beds which shall be bonded over concrete slabs or filled with a slurry of
neat cement, reinforcement will not be required.
c. A thick slurry of gray portland cement and fine screened sand of equal parts mixed with a
minimum amount of water shall be brushed or squeezed over the floor until all joints are
thoroughly filled and excess slurry shall be removed. Following to beat-in and adjustment, the
excess slurry shall be washed clean from the face of tile. Neat portland cement shall then be
applied to the floor and forced into the joints with the edge of a wood block or trowel. Excess
grout shall be removed by use of a sponge, squeeze or burlap to finish the joints and clean the
surface without disturbing the floor surface.
7. CURING
Floors shall be covered with waterproofed paper with joints lapped at least 10 cm and tape-sealed
or held down with planks or other weights. Floor shall be allowed to damp-cure for at least 72
hours before foot traffic is permitted thereon.
8. CONTROL JOINTS
Joints shall be formed as indicated and sealed as specified in SECTION 3E, MOISTURE
PROTECTION.
3H-2 Sheet 4 of 5
a. Control joints on walls shall be provided at control joints in backing material. Wherever
backing material changes, a control joint shall be formed to separate the different materials.
b. Control joints on floor shall be provided over construction joints and control joints in concrete
slabs.
9. CLEANING AND PROTECTING
Upon completion, tile floor and wall surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned. Acid shall not be used
for cleaning glazed tile. Floor tile with resinous grout or with factory mixed grout shall be cleaned
in accordance with the instructions of the grout manufacturer. After the grout has set, tile wall
surfaces shall be given a protective coat of a non-corrosive soap or other approved method of
protection. Tiled floor areas shall be covered with building paper before foot traffic is permitted
over the finished tile floors. Board walk ways shall be laid on tiled floors that are to be
continuously used as passage ways by workmen. Damaged or defective tiles shall be replaced by
the Contractor at his expenses.
3H-2 Sheet 5 of 5
SUB-SECTION 3H-3
FLOOR HARDENER
1. SCOPE
This Section includes all material and installation of floor hardener for buildings and related
works required under the Contract.
2. GENERAL
Floor Hardener is a pre-mixed dry powder, when meets water from the surface of the concrete
floor, will set together with concrete and provide a hard, abrasion and impact resistant and
dust free monolithic layer. Floor hardener layer is about 2-3 mm thick.
- COMPOSITION
Floor Hardener is combination of selected and well-graded non-oxidizing ferro aggregate,

Portland cement, plasticizer in powder form and other additives.
- TECHNICAL DATA
Compressive strength
ASTM C-942-1986 Max. 720 kg/cm2
Abrasion Resistance 0.0064 mm/min
Density ± 2.30 kg/liter
Setting time 4:30’ at 30° C
- PACKING
Floor Hardener is packed in 25 kg plastic bag with inner plastic bag.
- STORAGE
FLOOR HARDENER has shelf live at least 12 months, provided it is stored unopened in a
cool, dry location.
- HEALTH AND SAFETY
As with all cementations products, Floor Hardener has high alkali content and therefore skin
protection is recommended. Floor Hardener should be washed off immediately with clean
water and rubber gloves should be worn. Refer to the safety data sheet for more details.
3H-3 Sheet 1 of 3
3 APPLICATION
3.1 SUB GRADE REQUIREMENTS
 Minimum grade : 20 Mpa

 Slump :
70 – 100 mm for indoor application
100 – 120 mm for outdoor application
 Low rate of bleeding
 Low alkali content
 Minimum thickness : 75 mm
 Reinforcement to prevent cracks with using wire mesh or polypropylene fiber.
3.2 LEVELING METHOD
 Concrete placing to be planned carefully to prevent workers step on the wet concrete.
Placing method can be either lane system or chessboard system.
 The guidelines for levelness may be made of wood forms, steel profile, aluminum
profile, etc. as long as supported well and able to carry the ruler constantly during
leveling process.
 Installation mush be guided by proven technique and leveling equipments such as laser
system, water pass, etc.
 The ruler itself is made of aluminum profile with adequate length.
3.3 PLACING THE CONCRETE
 Concrete to be placed and well compacted according to ACI 302.

 Leave the concrete for the while. The water wills goes up. After the water disappears, it
is time to spread Floor Hardener. For better result, plastic hose might be used to remove
excessive water.
3.4 SPREADING
 Floor Hardener is spread onto the surface either manually or mechanically in 2-5 shakes,
depends on the targeted consumption. It is recommended to use 9-15 kg/m2 to get 3-4
mm thickness. If needed, use a simple mixer to mix Floor Hardener with 16 liters of
water to produce a slurry before applied.
 Next shake can be done after the previous shake has absorbed the water, indicated by
color change (to be darker)
 Stack the correct number of bags at each bay to be placed that day to give the finisher a
‘gauge’ for applying the right amount of material.
3H-3 Sheet 2 of 3
3.5 FINISHING
 First trowelling can be done after the concrete is strong enough to carry the finisher,
indicated when a man stands on the slabs he leaves footprints about 5-10 mm deep only.
 Final trowelling is done when the surface has set sufficiently. The trowell should be
slightly raised to give hard and smooth finish.
3.6 CURING
As soon as the last toweling finished, cover the floor with plastic sheet or a liquid curing
compound.
3H-3 Sheet 3 of 3
SUB-SECTION 3H-4
CEILING
1. SCOPE
a. This Section includes furnishing and installation of suspended ceilings for buildings and related
b. References
SECTION 3D, CARPENTRY
2. GENERAL
a. Ceiling shall be of type, size and design indicated, and installed in rooms and spaces by each type
respectively as indicated in the Drawings.
b. Shop Drawings
1. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings showing complete details, erection layouts and
installation instructions to the Engineer for approval. Details and layouts shall show weights,
gages or thickness of the sheet, joining and procedures to be followed during installation.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for any errors of detailing and fabrication, and for correct
fitting of the sheet as shown on the approved shop drawings.
3. MATERIALS
a. Plywood and Wood

Plywood shall be of 6 mm thickness. Plywood and wood shall comply with the applicable
requirements of SECTION 3C, CARPENTRY
b. Runners
Runners shall be of sizes and shapes and made of wood, steel angle shown on the Drawings.
c. Hangers
Hangers wire, rod and fastening devices shall be of galvanized steel in dimension shown on the
Drawings.
Materials delivered to the site shall be unloaded and stored with a minimum of handling. The storage
shall be in dry location with adequate ventilation, free from dust or water and shall permit easy access
3H-4 Sheet 1 of 2
for inspection and handling. Materials shall be stored neatly on the floor, properly stacked on non-
absorptive strips or wood platforms.
5. INSTALLATION
a. Rooms and spaces receiving ceiling finish shall be completed with windows, doors, glazing and
any work producing moisture prior to commencing the ceiling work.
b. Erection
1. Hanger wires or rods shall in all cases be vertical and be suspended from structural supports
or from intermediate framing members, and secured and tied in a secure manner. Main and
cross runners, grid channels, cross tees and hangers shall be provided at no more than 1200
cm on center. Where structural supporting members are at such spacing that the above
requirements can not be complied with, adequate intermediate support shall be provided.
2. Suspension system shall be of concealed systems as specified. The system shall incorporate
adequate provisions for thermal expansion to prevent buckling.
3. The system shall be symmetrical about the center line of the spaces unless otherwise
indicated. Joints at ceiling penetrations of other work shall be neatly made and shall be
jointed as tight as practicable. Edge members shall be set tightly against the wall as shown on
the Drawings. Joints shall be even and shall have one-piece units with bend to conform to
masonry unit. Furring of runners shall be kept 12.7 mm clear of walls or partition.
c. Openings
Access panels shall be provided in ceilings by providing a removable panel not less than 30 x 60
cm in size and of the same construction, appearance and finish as adjacent and adjoining tiles.
Other than access panel, support members shall be provided at ceiling openings such as those
required for recessed lighting fixtures. Support members shall be of the sizes required to support
the load of lighting or other fixtures, wiring conduit, without permitting deflections of the ceiling.
6. CLEANING AND PROTECTION
Following the erection, dirty or discolored surfaces of ceiling and support systems shall be cleaned in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and left free from defects. Damaged or
improperly installed components shall be removed and be replaced as directed by the Engineer
without additional cost to the Employer.
7. FINISHES
Painting finishes where required for plywood ceiling or unfinished wood part of ceiling shall be
applied in accordance with the applicable painting requirements of Sub-Section 3H-4, PAINTING.
3H-4 Sheet 2 of 2
SUB-SECTION 3H-5
PAINTING
1. SCOPE
a. This Section includes painting for buildings and related works required under the Contract.
b. Reference
SECTION 2L, FINISHES
2. GENERAL
a. The term "paint" as used herein includes emulsions, enamels, oil paint, stains, varnishes,
scalars and other coatings, whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats.
b. The following publications listed below, but referred to thereafter by basic designation only,
1) JIS Publications
K 5400 General Testing Methods for Coating
K 5506 White Wood Primer
K 5511 Ready Mixed Zinc Oxide Paint (White and Tint)
K 5513 Tinted Zinc Oxide Ready Mixed Oil Paint
K 5515 Ready Mixed Color Paint
K 5591 Oil Primer
K 5621 Anticorrosive Paints for General Use
K 5665 Synthetic Resin Emulsion Paint
2) NI Publication : NI-4
c. The Contractor shall furnish either one of the following data of paint proposed to use for all
batches in excess of 1.9 Litre.
1) A test report showing that the proposed batch met all specification requirements
2) A test report showing that a previous batch manufactured using the same formulation as
that used in manufacturing the proposed batch met all specification requirements and a
report showing test result on the proposed batch for the properties such as weight per
Litre, viscosity, fineness of grind, drying time, color and gloss for which the requirements
are specified herein.
3H-5 Sheet 1 of 6
3. MATERIALS
a. Paints shall be in sealed containers that plainly show the designated name, formula or
specification number, batch number, color, quantity involved, date of manufacture,
manufacturer's formulation number, manufacturer's directions and name of manufacturer all
of which shall be plainly legible at the time of use. Pigmented paints shall be furnished in
containers not larger than 1.9 Litre. Materials shall conform to the specification shown in the
painting schedule in the Drawings and to the requirements specified hereinafter. When the
required quantity of a material of a particular color is 1.9 Litre or less, a proprietary brand of
material similar to the specified may be proposed and the responsibility of the Contractor for
inspection may be waived.
b. Emulsion paint for the exterior surfaces of concrete, cement plaster and asbestos cement sheet
shall conform to JIS K 5665, type I (for exterior), or equivalent.
c. Exterior oil paint shall conform to the following specifications or equivalent.
1) White : JIS K 5511
2) Light tints : JIS K 5513
3) Other deep colors : JIS K 5515
d. Oil stain for stain on open-grain wood surfaces shall be in accordance with manufacturer's
specifications.
e. Varnish for wood surfaces to receive stain or natural finish shall be of phenolic resin varnish.
f. Ferrous-metal primer shall conform to JIS K 5591, K 5621, or equivalent.
g. White wood primer shall conform to JIS K 5506 or equivalent.
h. Fungicide
The material specified for the first coat and each subsequent coat shall contain a fungicide
that will not adversely affect the color, texture or durability of the coating. The fungicidal
agent shall be incorporated into the paint by the manufacturer in a quantity. In addition, all
paints used in wet areas such as toilets, showers and kitchen shall be provided with fungicide.
i. Zinc-dust-containing paint shall conform to JIS K 5626 or equivalent.
Paint proposed to use shall be delivered to the site sufficiently in advance of need to allow 30
days for testing as specified hereinafter, and stored in sealed and labeled containers or segregated
at the source of supply under the water-proof and well ventilated storage.
5. TESTING
Testing procedures and reports shall be as specified in JIS K 5400 or equivalent. Upon
notification by the Contractor that the material is at the site or source of supply, a 1-Litre sample
of each batch except for small quantities for which the use of proprietary brands has been
3H-5 Sheet 2 of 6
approved by the Engineer shall be taken by random selection from the sealed containers by the
Contractor selection in the presence of the Engineer. The contents of the sampled containers shall
be so thoroughly mixed as to render the sample truly representative. Samples shall be clearly
identified by designated name, specification number, batch number, intended use and quantity
involved. At the direction of the Engineer, samples may be treated by the Engineer before
approval or materials may be approved for use based on the test reports furnished. If the
materials are approved based on reports furnished by the Contractor, samples will be retained by
the Engineer for possible future testing, should the materials appear to be defective during or
after application.
If the sample is tested by the Engineer and fails to meet specification requirements, the materials
represented by the samples shall be replaced and retested to the satisfaction of the Engineer for
which cost and expenses shall be borne by the Contractor.
a. Hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures and similar items
in contact with painted surfaces and not to be painted shall be removed, or otherwise
protected prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Exposed nails and other
ferrous metal on or in contact with surfaces to be painted with water-thinned paints shall be
spot-primed with zinc dust, zinc dust-zinc oxide, red lead, basic lead silica chromate, or zinc
chromate primer. Surfaces to be painted shall be clean before applying paint or surface
treatments surfaces not to be painted shall be in a new condition and shall be wire- brushed
and touched up to remove all evidence of rust, corrosion or abrasion.
Oil and grease shall be removed with clean cloths and cleaning solvents shall be of low
toxicity and shall have a flash-point in excess of 38 C. Cleaning and painting shall be so
programmed that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet,
newly painted surfaces.
b. Concrete and cement mortar surfaces to be painted shall be prepared by removing

efflorescence, dust, dirt, grease, oil, asphalt, tar, excessive mortar and mortar dropping and by
roughening to remove glaze. Surface deposits of free iron shall be removed prior to painting.
Surface to be painted shall be uniformly and thoroughly dampened with no free surface water
visible, by several applications of potable water with a fog spray allowing time between the
spraying for the water to be absorbed.
c. Wood Surfaces
1) Wood surfaces, except surfaces to be given natural finish, shall be primed and finish
coated. Wood surfaces to be painted shall be cleaned of dirt, oil and other foreign
substances with mineral spirits, scrapers and/or sandpaper.
Finished exposed-to-view surfaces shall be made smooth by sandpapering. Glazing

rabbets and beads in exterior sash and doors shall be primed prior to glazing. Edges of
doors that have been trimmed during hanging and fitting shall immediately be given two
coats of the specified first coat material. Small, dry and seasoned knots shall be surface-
scraped and thoroughly cleaned and shall be given a thin coat of knot sealer before
application of the priming coat. Pitch on large, open, unseasoned knots and all other
beads or streaks of pitch shall be scraped off, or if still soft, shall be removed with mineral
spirits or turpentine and the resinous area shall be thinly coated with knot sealer. The
surfaces shall be checked to insure that finishing nails have been properly set, then all
holes and surface imperfections shall be primed. After priming, all holes and
imperfections in finish surfaces shall be filled with putty or plastic wood filler, colored to
3H-5 Sheet 3 of 6
match the finish coat if natural finish is required, and allowed to dry and sandpapered
smooth. Unless otherwise authorized, painting shall proceed only when the moisture
content of the wood does not exceed 12% as measured by a moisture meter.
2) Interior wood surfaces to receive stained or natural finish, except as hereinafter specified,
shall be properly prepared to the approved shade and lightly sanded. Teak and other open-
grain wood shall be given the same treatment and, in addition, shall be given a coat of
paste wood filler not less than 8 hours after the application of stain. Excess filler shall be
removed and the surface then be sanded smooth. Each varnish coat shall be lightly sanded
prior to application of subsequent coat.
d. Ferrous surface that has not been shop-coated shall be solvent- cleaned to remove oil and
grease. Surface that contain loose rust, loose mill scale and other foreign substances shall be
mechanically cleaned by power wire brushing or sand-blasting. Minor amounts of residual
rust that cannot be removed except by thorough blast- cleaning and tight mill scale that cannot
be removed by applying a sharp knife to any edge will be allowed to remain. After cleaning,
one coats of ferrous metal primer shall be applied to ferrous surfaces to receive paint other
than asphalt varnish, vinyl paint and vinyl-alkyd paint. The semitransparent film may be
applied to but shall be over coated with the specified ferrous metal primer prior to application
of finish coats.
1) Shop coated ferrous surfaces shall be stored out of contact with the ground in such
manner and location as will minimize the formation of water-holding pockets, soiling,
contamination and deterioration of the paint film. Such metal work shall be protected
from corrosion before and after installation by treating corroded areas immediately upon
detection. Abraded or corroded spots on shop-coated surfaces shall be wire-brushed and
touched up with the same or similar material applied to the shop coat.
e. Galvanized surfaces to be painted shall be solvent-cleaned and treated with vinyl type wash
coat. Galvanized surfaces not to be painted shall be solvent-cleaned.
f. Plaster surfaces shall be clean, free from grit, loose plaster and surface irregularities, and shall
have an instrument-measured moisture content not exceeding 8 %.
g. Asbestos cement surfaces shall be dry and clean prior to application of the specified first coat
material. Oil and grease shall be carefully removed by the use of suitable solvents. Wire
brushing shall not be permitted. After the first coat has been dry and prior to application of
finish coat, touch-up coats shall be applied to suction spots.
7. APPLICATION OF PAINT
The finished surfaces shall be free from runs, drops, ridges, waves, laps, brush marks and
variations in color texture and finish. The hiding shall be complete and each coat shall be so
applied as to produce film of uniform thickness. Special attention shall be given to insure that all
surfaces including edges, corners, crevices, welds and rivets receive a film thickness equivalent
to that of adjacent painted surfaces. Respirators shall be worn by persons engaged or assisting in
spray painting. Adjacent areas and installation shall be protected by the use of drop cloths or
other approved precautionary measures. Metal or wood surfaces adjacent to surfaces to receive
water-thinned paints shall be primed and/or touched up prior to the application of water- thinned
paints. The first coat on plaster shall include such repeated touching up of suction spots or overall
applications of primer-sealer as necessary to produce a uniform color and gloss. The first coat on
both faces of wood doors shall be applied at essentially the same time.
3H-5 Sheet 4 of 6
a. Coating Progress
Sufficient time shall be elapsed between successive coats to permit proper drying. This period
shall be modified as necessary to suit adverse weather conditions. Oil base or oleo resinous
solvent type paints shall be considered dry for recoating when the paints feel firm, do not
deform or feel sticky under moderate pressure of the thumb and the application of another
coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat.
b. Mixing and Thinning
At the time of application, paint shall show no signs of hard settling, excessive skinning,
levering, or other deterioration. Paint shall be thoroughly stirred, strained and kept at a
uniform consistency during application. Paints of different manufactures shall not be mixed
together. Where necessary to suit conditions of surface, temperature, weather and method of
application, packaged paint may be thinned immediately prior to application in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions, but not in excess of 0.125 litre of suitable thinner per
litre. The use of thinner for any reason shall not relieve the Contractor from obtaining
complete hiding.
c. Time Between Surface Preparation and Painting
Surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated and otherwise prepared for painting shall be given
a coat of the specified first coat materials as soon as practicable after such preparation has
been completed, but in any event prior to any deterioration of the prepared surface.
d. Method of Paint Application
1. Metal
First coats shall be applied by brush, except that where the item has been shop-primed or
field-primed, the first coat may be applied by brush, roller or spray. Subsequent coats
may be applied by brush, roller or spray.
2. Other surfaces may be coated by brush, roller or spray, except for filler coats. Application
of styrene-butadiene filler shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Surface
voids, pores and cracks shall be filled, and the dry film shall be uniform and free from pin
holes or other voids. Surface irregularities need not be completely filled. The material
shall not be applied over caulking compound.
3. Exterior Emulsion Paint
At least 24 hours shall be elapsed before applying exterior emulsion paint. When the
ambient temperature is in excess of 30 C, surfaces shall be lightly dampened with a fog
spray of potable water immediately prior to application of the subsequent paint coat.
8. PAINTING SCHEDULE
a. General Paint Schedule
1. Protective shop coating for exposed general metal structures shall be as follows.
a. Primer : 1 (one) coat of red-lead zinc chromate anti-corrosive paint, 75 microns,

conforming to JIS K 5628 or approved equal.
3H-5 Sheet 5 of 6
b. Coating : 2 coats of anti-corrosive paint for general use, 150 microns, conforming to
JIS K 5621 or approved equal, or 2 coats of marine paint of approved quality for
structures on and near the sea.
2. Protective shop coating for the pipelines and appurtenance works, except that for
galvanized pipes, shall be as follows.
a. Primer : 1 (one) coat of inorganic zinc, 75 microns, of approved quality
b. Coating : 2 coats of epoxy polyamide high build, 125 microns, of approved quality.
3. Cement plastered wall and wood shall be painted with 1 (one) coat of linseed oil and 2
coats of oil paint of approved quality, unless otherwise specified in other section of the
Specifications.
b. Color of paint for various structures shall be as directed by the Engineer.
c. Except as Specified under clause 9, SURFACES NOT TO BE PAINTED hereinafter, the

surfaces listed in the finish schedule shall receive the surface preparation, paints and number
of coats as prescribed herein. Piping shall not be painted until the piping has tested and
approved.
d. Shop Painted Items

Surface of fabricated and assembled items that are finish-painted under other Sections of the
Specifications are exempted from the requirements for surface preparation and painting.
Shop-primed items shall receive surface preparation and finish painting as required by this
Specifications.
e. Color and tints, including shades of stain, shall match the respective color specimens selected
by the Engineer. Under coats shall vary slightly from the color of the next coat. Stains shall
conform in shade to manufacturer's standard color.
f. Surface Preparation and Pretreatment

Cleaning and pretreatment of surfaces shall be accomplished prior to painting in accordance
with the detailed requirements specified.
9. SURFACES NOT TO BE PAINTED
The following items will not be required to paint.
a. Unexposed interior ferrous surfaces, either galvanized or not.

b. Factory finish-painted equipment
c. Other items or surfaces so indicated not to be paint-finished.
10. CLEANING
Cloths and cotton waste that might constitute a fire hazard shall be placed in closed metal
containers or destroyed at the end of each day work. Upon completion of the work, staging,
scaffolding and containers shall be removed from the site or destroyed in an approved manner.
Paint spots, oil or stains upon adjacent surfaces shall be removed and the entire job left clean and
acceptable.
3H-5 Sheet 6 of 6
SECTION 3I
SPECIALTIES
1. SCOPE
a. This Section includes all materials and installation of toilet, lavatory and kitchen accessories
for buildings and related works required under the Contract.
b. References
SECTION 4H, POTABLE WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
SECTION 4J, SEWERAGE AND SANITATION SYSTEM
2. GENERAL
a. Toilet, lavatory and kitchen accessories as specified herein shall be provided in accordance
with the schedule hereinafter. The requirements for these accessory items shown on the
Drawings or this Specification are intended only to show the standard of the materials on
which the design of the particular work is based, and also to avoid ambiguous descriptions of
the materials. Locally manufactured items may be acceptable provided variations there from
shall not reduce the strength or impair the function required.
b. Each accessory item shall be complete with necessary mounting plates, anchors and fasteners.
Concealed mounting plates shall be of sturdy construction and may be unpolished or un
plated.
c. Submittal
1) The Contractor shall submit catalogue, sample and color of materials proposed for use to
the Engineer for approval before materials represented by the samples are delivered to the
site.
2) Manufacturer's printed specifications, standards, installation instructions and shop

drawings shall also be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
3. MATERIALS
a. The materials of sanitary fixtures shall be manufactured in acid resisting, heavy duty and high
density vitreous china. The surface shall be smooth, wear-proof and non-crazing glaze.
b. Anchors and fasteners shall be capable of developing a retaining force commensurate with the
strength necessary to be mounted and shall be well suited for use with the supporting
construction.
Where exposed fasteners are permitted, they shall have oval heads and finish to match the
accessory.
3I Sheet 1 of 2
c. Accessory items shall conform to the respective specifications and other requirements
specified below.
1) Toilet and Lavatory Fixtures
a) Water closet, western style
b) Squatting Closet : JIS or equivalent, with built in foot-treads and

integral S-trap.
c) Wall-hung urinal
d) Wall-hung washbasin : JIS or equivalent, with faucet and fittings
e) Mirror glass : 60 x 60 cm in size, 6 mm thick
f) Soap holder : Stainless steel
g) Floor drain with siphon : JIS or equivalent
2. Kitchen Fixtures
a) Kitchen sink : Stainless steel sink, one bowl with drain Board
b) Sink tap : JIS or equivalent
4. INSTALLATION
Toilet, lavatory and kitchen accessories shall be securely fastened to the supporting construction
in accordance with the approved submittals. Accessories shall be protected from damage during
installation until completion of the work.
5. SCHEDULE
Schedule of accessory items shall be as detailed in the Drawings.
3I Sheet 2 of 2
SECTION 4A
GENERAL ELECTRICAL WORK
SUB-SECTION 4A-1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1. SCOPE
a. This Section sets forth general requirements applicable to all electrical work for this Contract.
b. The requirements in this Section shall form a part of the following sections.
SECTION 4B, POWER SUPPLY AND FACILITIES
SECTION 4C, LIGHTING SYSTEM
SECTION 4E, LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
c. References
DIVISION 3, BUILDING WORKS
SECTION 4G, GENERAL MECHANICAL WORK
2. GENERAL
a. Code and Standard
The electrical work covered by this Specification shall be carried out in accordance with:
- Peraturan Umum Instalasi Listrik (PUIL) - 1988

- Peraturan Umum Instalasi Penangkal Petir (PUIPP)
- Japanese Industrial Standard (JIS)
- International Electro technical Commission (IEC)
- Verband Deutscher Electrotechniker (VDE)
- Standard Industri Indonesia (SII)
- British Standard (BS)
b. Installation Requirements
1) The Contractor shall perform all work required under this Specification and as shown on
the Drawings.
2) All work shall be performed by qualified and well experienced personnel in a manner
acceptable to the Engineer, and/or to any local authority having jurisdiction.
3) The Contractor shall be in possession of Pass III from PLN for power supply and lighting
system, and have sufficient experience in other works required under the Contract.
4A-1 Sheet 1 of 6
c. Equipment and Materials
All equipment and material shall be new and shall be of the best of their respective kinds
suitably tropicalized and adequately protected against the prevailing climate condition of the
site. The equipment and materials shall be standard products of a reputable manufacturer who
is regularly engaged in the production of such products and equipment that have a proven
record of satisfaction for not less than 5 years and who has field services engineers, readily
available, for maintenance and operating consultation, and will provide these services as
required without additional charge to the Employer.
3. CONFER WITH OTHER WORK
a. The Contractor shall confer with contractor/s of other works who have interface with the
Contractor's work required under the Contract as to construction method and schedule.
b. The Contractor shall bear sole responsibility what so ever arising there from on his
construction plan or schedule due to his miss arrangement of his work with other contractor/s
related at the interface of the work with them.
4. SUBMITTALS
a. Refer to SECTION 1H, SUBMITTALS.
b. Equipment and Materials List
As soon as practicable after signing of the Contract and before commencing work at site, the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a complete list of all items of equipment
and materials he proposes to use in the work, giving names, ratings, capacities and full
description required to identify the item. Considerations will not be given to partial lists
submitted from time to time. No item shall be purchased until written approval has been given
by the Engineer.
c. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer for approval detailed shop drawings
showing the following.
1) Conduit piping using for cabling and wiring
2) Exact location and dimensions of pull boxes and junction boxes, if necessary
3) Exact layout of lighting, receptacles, panel boards, grounding, lightning rod, etc.
4) Exact layout of equipment in substation, motors or other electrical equipment including

details of foundation
5) Other drawings required by the Engineer
d. The Contractor shall also submit, for approval of the Engineer, detailed working drawings
showing construction details and equipment mounting details.
4A-1 Sheet 2 of 6
5. MATERIALS
a. The Engineer reserves the right to reject even after the Contract is signed, material or
equipment submitted by the Contractor for the required services, if the said material or
equipment does not comply with the requirements of the Specification, and unless the
Contractor had drawn the attention of the Engineer in writing to any deviation in his offer and
such deviations were accepted at the time of adjudication, the Contractor shall be required to
resubmit other material or equipment that will comply with the Specification.
b. The Contractor shall submit 3 sets of further details of all electrical equipment covered by this
Specification together with all dimensioned drawings and, on the request of the Engineer, a
sample of any material or equipment with manufacturer's published data or any description
written in the English language.
c. Where, due to non-availability of any material or for any other reason, the Contractor desires
to substitute another brand or type of material or equipment for the one approved, the
Contractor shall submit his application for approval to the Engineer accompanied with the
following.
1) Samples of the proposed materials or equipment with all necessary technical information
2) Detailed comparison of the properties of both items
3) Detailed price analysis of both items
4) Explicit reasons for desiring the change
d. All steel work shall be thoroughly cleaned by hand or given similar and equal treatment after
all welding and fabrication is completed. Before painting, all scale, rust, oil and grease shall
be removed and treated with a rust inhibiting solution. At least 3 coats including base primer
shall be applied in the manufacturer's work to obtain a high class finish. The interiors or panel
shall be mat white finish unless otherwise indicated, and where not indicated, in a color
6. LABELING
a. General
All electrical equipment shall be provided with a name plate or label permanently attached to
them in a conspicuous position designating the service of the particular equipment. These
name plates and labels shall be of non-corrosive and non-hygroscopic material with engraved
lettering in English and Indonesian and of contrasting colors. The inscriptions shall be
b. Circuit labels shall be made from synthetic resin with letters engraved in English and
Indonesian. The size of the circuit label shall be subject to approval of the Engineer.
c. Cables
1) Each cable when completely installed shall have permanently attached to it at each end
and at intermediate positions as may be considered necessary by the Engineer, non-
corrosive metal plates upon which shall be engraved or stamped, the identification
number of the cable, voltage, rating, conductor size and manufacturer.
4A-1 Sheet 3 of 6
2) The cable identification numbers shall comply with the cable schedules which shall be
prepared by the Contractor according to the actually laid cables. These cables schedules
shall indicate the cable numbers, cable sizes, voltage, number of conductors, conductor
size, termination and connections at each end and cable route.
7. INSPECTION AND TESTING DURING MANUFACTURE
a. The Engineer shall be entitled at all reasonable times during manufacture to inspect, examine
and test on the Contractor's premises the materials and workmanship of all equipment to be
supplied under the Contract, and if part of the said plant is being manufactured on other
premises, the Contractor shall obtain permission for the Engineer to inspect, examine and test
as if the said plant were being manufactured on the Contractor's premises. Such inspection or
testing, if made, shall not release the Contractor from any obligation under the Contract.
b. Above test and inspection may alternatively be carried out by internationally recognized
authority appointed by the Contractor but whose name has been approved by the Engineer.
c. Routine tests for various equipment shall be carried out and any material or works which do
not comply with the Specification or do not pass the specified test, shall be replaced or made
good at the Contractor's expense.
d. The Contractor shall also submit copies of all test certificates for various equipment, and if
the Engineer is not satisfied with the results of any test, such test shall be repeated at the
Contractor's expense.
e. Where the Contract provides for test on the premises of the Contractor or of any sub-
contractor, the Contractor shall provide such assistance, labor, materials, electricity, fuel,
stores, apparatus and instruments at his expense as may be requisite and as may reasonably
demanded to carry out such test efficiently.
8. NOTICE OF TEST ON SITE
a. The Contractor shall give to the Engineer in writing 21 days notice of the date after which he
will be ready to make any tests. Unless otherwise agreed, the tests shall take place within 10
days after the said date, on such day or days as the Engineer will in writing notify the
Contractor.
b. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the tests are being unduly delayed, he may give notice in
writing to call upon the Contractor to make such tests within 10 days from the receipt of the
said notice. The Contractor shall make the said tests on such day within the said 10 days as
the Contractor may fix and of which he shall give notice to the Engineer.
If the Contractor fails to make such tests within the time aforesaid, the Engineer may himself
proceed to make the tests. All tests so made by the Engineer shall be at the risk and expense
of the Contractor. If any portion of the works fails to pass the tests, tests of the said portion
shall, if required by the Engineer or the Contractor, be repeated within a reasonable time upon
the same terms and conditions until the Engineer is satisfied.
4A-1 Sheet 4 of 6
9. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION MANUALS
The Contractor shall provide and submit 3 sets of instruction manuals in English and Indonesian
for operation and maintenance before the Employer takes over entire electrical works covered
under this Specification. These manuals shall include at least the following.
a. Manufacturer's technical catalogues, dimensional drawings and wiring diagrams for each and
every type of equipment installed
b. Operating instructions for various equipment and systems
c. Maintenance manuals for various equipment and systems
d. Spare parts list along with part numbers of various components for all equipment
e. Copies of all warranties and manufacturer's guarantees issued in respect of any equipment
supplied and installed
10. DEFECTS AND LIABILITY PERIOD
a. The Contractor shall be responsible for remedying, with all possible speed, any defects arising
from defective materials or workmanship, or from any act or omission of the Contractor that
may develop under the conditions provided for by the Contract and under proper use in the
works or any portion thereof within the period prescribed in the General Conditions after the
works or that portion thereof, as the case may be, has been taken over.
b. Until complete handing over of the works, the Contractor shall have the right to access, at all
reasonable working hours, at his own risk and expense, by himself or his duly authorized
representatives whose names shall have previously been communicated in writing to the
Employer, to all parts of the works for the purpose of inspecting the working thereof and to
the records of the working and performance thereof for the purpose of inspecting the same
and taking notes there from, subject to the Employer's approval, which shall not be
unreasonably withheld. The Contractor may at his own risk and expense make any tests which
he considers desirable.
11. COMPLETION TEST
a. The Contractor shall give in writing a 21 days advance notice to the Engineer of the date after
which the Contractor is ready to make the completion tests. Unless otherwise agreed, the tests
shall be carried out within 10 days thereafter and on such days as will be notified by the
Engineer to the Contractor.
b. Adjustment
Prior to the tests, the Contractor shall adjust all equipment and the work to ensure the proper
operation thereof and shall be solely responsible for the correctness of the same.
c. Tests
The Contractor shall carry out the specified completion tests of the works in the presence and
under supervision of the Engineer upon completion thereof. Items and methods of tests shall
4A-1 Sheet 5 of 6
be as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary equipment, tools,
instruments, materials, labor, etc., for carrying out the tests. The Contractor shall submit for
approval of the Engineer all data of the tests.
d. Failure of Tests
In the event that any portion of the works fails to pass the tests, the Contractor shall research
the reason of such failure and shall report as directed by the Engineer on such portion or on
the whole of the works, within the time to be specified by the Engineer. The tests shall then
be repeated until the results are satisfactory to the Engineer.
12. SPARE PARTS
All electrical equipment to be supplied by the Contractor under the Contract shall be
accomplished by the spare parts necessary for maintaining such equipment and lighting lamps for
2 (two) year period, unless otherwise specified in each section of the Specifications. The
Contractor shall submit a list of spare parts, for the approval of the Engineer, when he submits the
shop drawings for such equipment.
The Contractor shall guarantee that the spare parts mentioned in the list will be available within 2
(two) years to make the equipment functions well.
The unit prices entered by the Contractor for items of such equipment in the Bill of Quantities
shall be considered to include cost for such spare parts.
4A-1 Sheet 6 of 6
SUB-SECTION 4A-2
CABLING AND WIRING
1. SCOPE
This Section includes general requirements for cabling and wiring required for the electrical work
2. GENERAL
a. All cables shall be suitable for operating at the specified voltage under the condition of the
maximum conductor operating temperature which shall be less than 60 C at rated current.
b. Power cables shall be delivered to the site on sub-stantial non-returnable wooden drums, each
bearing a securely fixed label stating gross weight, serial number, length of cable and other
description.
c. Covers shall be provided around the periphery of the drum in order to protect the cable in
transit. The inner cable end shall be adequately protected by a metal quad or other approved
means.
d. Small cables shall be delivered to the site in a manner not to cause damage there upon during
transportation and handling.
e. Both ends of the cable shall be sealed by a suitable method to prevent the entrance of
moisture.
3. MATERIALS
a. Various types of cables are to be applied for the work by each type of services and functions.
The Contractor shall carefully check the Drawings and submit detailed cable schedules
showing origin and destination of cables by each type, size and service to the Engineer for
approval.
b. All cables except "BC" listed below shall have evidence of approval by LMK, SPLN or SII
clearly labeled on the insulation surface of cables. Following list shows the general
description of cables to be used for the work.
Type Description
NYFGby : 1000 V, copper, 1 to 4 cores, metal wrapped around for underground

installation
NYY : 1000 V, copper, 1 to 4 cores, for indoor power cables, additional

protection for underground installation
NYM : 500 V, copper, 1 to 4 cores, for indoor installation
BC : Bare copper conductor for lightning grounding connection
4A-2 Sheet 1 of 4
4. INSTALLATION
a. Cables and wires shall be run into conduit pipe, installed in cable tray or trench, installed
underground or installed exposal if approved or specified, in a manner specified herein and
shown on the Drawings.
b. Where the cables are taken into panel, the cables shall be set in the panel using suitable cable
glands.
c. No cable connection shall be permitted in conduit and the jointing fixtures shall be suitable to
accommodate the cables.
d. Where the cable is bent, the radius of curvature shall be more than 8 times the diameter of
common cables and 15 times the diameter of high voltage cables.
5. CONDUIT
a. General
All conduit pipes for cabling to branch circuits shall be of rigid steel conduit. In hazardous
location, rigid steel conduit run with seal fittings shall be installed as required in accordance
with the requirements of NEC.
b. Installation of Conduit
1) The ends of conduits shall be well reamed to remove burrs and rough edges. Field cuts
shall be made square and true so that the ends will butt or come together for the full
circumference thereof.
2) After installation, damaged or rusted metallic conduit surface shall be painted with
galvanize paint or equal.
3) Conduit bends, except factory bends, shall have a radius of not less than 6 times the inside
diameter of the conduit. Where factory bends are not used, conduit shall be bent, using an
approved conduit bending tool employing correctly sized dies, without crimping or
flattening, using the longest radius practicable.
4) All steel conduit shall be cut square and all joints shall butt together tightly in order to
ensure maximum electrical continuity.
5) Heavy hexagon locknuts shall be used at all positions where running joints are required in
metal conduits and care shall be taken to ensure that they seat firmly and evenly onto
mating faces of coupling or other adjacent accessories.
6) Conduit and accessories shall be kept clean during construction. Clogged conduit shall be
replaced.
7) A pull wire shall be inserted in each empty conduit. The wire shall be 1.6 mm zinc coated
or PVC-sheathed steel and not less than 25 cm of slack shall be left at each end of pull
wire.
4A-2 Sheet 2 of 4
6. PULL BOX
Pull boxes shall be installed at the locations as necessary and as shown on the shop drawings, and
at such additional points as ordered by the Engineer. The Contractor shall install, at his own
expense, such additional boxes as may be desired to facilitate the work. All pull boxes shall be
marked with checkered plate cover painted in accordance with the painting requirements of
7. UNDERGROUND CABLES
a. Underground cable installation shall be carried out in compliance with the regulations of the
local authorities, indications of the Drawings and in a manner prescribed below.
1) A trench shall be prepared as shown on the Drawings, then filled and stamped with 10 cm
thick bed sand.
2) Cables shall be laid down on the bed sand and must not be subject to stress. Sand shall be
filled thereafter up to 10 cm above the largest cable.
3) On the sand level above location of each cable, concrete tiles shall be placed continuously
along the direction of the cable.
4) Final filling of the trench shall be done using the original excavated materials.
5) All steps of excavation, filling sand, laying down cables, and final filling shall be
inspected by the Engineer and approved prior to proceeding subsequent step.
b. Above ground along the location of concrete tiles, the indicating steel boards shall be placed
at distances of 30 m marked up with "KABEL TANAH". The board shall be painted yellow
and the letters in red as approved by the Engineer. Where cables are changed their direction or
curved, the board shall be provided in the same manner specified herein.
c. When an underground connection is unavoidable and approved by the Engineer, a jointing

box using 3M cast resin should be applied. Above ground, a sign stating "MOF KABEL"
shall be placed in a manner directed by the Engineer.
d. Cables crossing under the road, if occurs, shall be installed in a manner shown on the
Drawings or on the approved shop drawings.
8. GROUNDING
a. Conduit and cabinets shall be made mechanically and electrically secure to form a continuous
system, and shall be effectively grounded. Bonding and grounding jumpers shall be copper
wire of the same cross-sectional area for all systems.
b. Metallic boxes shall employ hubs of double lock nuts and bushings. The bonding of all
conduits, lightings and panels to form a continuous ground system shall be in accordance with
applicable code and standard.
c. Size of grounding wire shall be minimum 50 mm2 bare copper conductor or as approved by
the Engineer.
4A-2 Sheet 3 of 4
Grounding pipe shall be galvanized steel of diameter and length shown on the Drawings or
approved shop drawings, thermo-welded or using connection hardware to the 50 mm2
grounding wire.
d. The Contractor shall investigate each site and measure the grounding resistance of the sites.
After taking the data, the Contractor shall obtain the Engineer's approval of his investigation.
e. The grounding resistance shall be 5 ohms or less, or as approved by the Engineer.
f. Details of all grounding points shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer for
approval.
9. TESTS
a. Insulation Resistance Test
Insulation resistance test of the electrical installation shall be carried out based on recognized
regulations in addition to the requirements below.
1) Insulation resistance test shall be performed with a minimum 500 V mugger manually
rotated or electronically operated by push button means. For high voltage installation, the
insulation resistance test shall be performed in compliance with the regulations of PLN
or as directed by The Engineer.
2) During the tests, all fixtures and switches should be in the open position.
3) Testing shall be carried out one time for every group of installation.
4) The minimum allowable resistance shall be 5 mega ohms or allowable leak current shall
not be more than 1 (one) mA.
b. Grounding Resistance Test
After the ground pipe is buried, a grounding resistance test shall be carried out by the
Contractor in the presence of the Engineer.
1) Test shall be performed according to the appropriate method of grounding testing with an
electronic grounding resistance tester.
2) The maximum allowable resistance shall be 5 ohms.
4A-2 Sheet 4 of 4
SECTION 4B
POWER SUPPLY AND DISTRIBUTION FACILITIES
1. SCOPE
a. This Section includes materials, equipment and installation of power supply and distribution
facilities, and related works required under the Contract.
b. References
SECTION 3A, CONCRETE

SECTION 4A, GENERAL ELECTRICAL WORK
2. GENERAL
a. Power supply facilities to be specified herein includes the following items.
1) Diesel generator set
2) Low voltage main distribution panel (LVMDP)
3) Sub-distribution panel (SDP)
b. Cabling from a sub-station to low voltage distribution panel in the Port will be performed
by Indonesian Electricity Authority (Perusahaan Listrik Negara - PLN). However, material
and cost including the sub-station shall be included in this project.
c. Submittals
Refer to SECTION 1H, SUBMITTALS and SECTION 4A, GENERAL ELECTRICAL

WORK.
a. Diesel Generator Set
1) Diesel generator set shall have the following specifications.
a) Type of engine : Diesel engine driven, turbo-charged, after-cooled with standard

radiator, sound proofing.
b) Capacity : 25 KVA
c) Frequency : 50 hertz  3%
d) Voltage : 220/380 V, 3-phase, with solidly grounded neutral
2) Diesel generator set shall be complete with the following attachments.
4B Sheet 1 of 3
a) Structural Base
Support structure for engine, generator and fuel tank as stable operation platform to
insure a solid installation.
b) Lifting Arch
Lifting structure of generator set at single point lift.
c) Water Separator
For protection of fuel injection system from water contamination.
d) Charging Alternator
Belt driven alternator including regulator and a control panel-mounted ammeter to
charge or retain battery charge in prime power application.
e) Battery and Battery Rack

Batteries having cold starting ability for 24-volts starting system, with sturdy metal
rack for convenient mounting of batteries on structural base, including cables for
connections.
f) Pre-cleaner
For removing airborne dirt to 70 - 90 % before air goes to filters.
g) Services Indicator
For visual signal when replacing or servicing air filters.
h) Heavy-duty Air Cleaner

Two-stage, dry-type cleaner for protecting engine in heavy dust, dirt, lint, sawdust or
other airborne materials.
i) Muffler
For improving sound suppression and maximum performance.
j) Vibration Isolator
For isolating engine vibrations from surrounding structure.
k) Flexible Exhaust Fitting

For allowing exhaust outlet to fit variety of installation arrangements.
l) Primary Fuel Filter

For reducing chance of contaminants entering fuel system
m) Woodward PSG Governor

For constant frequency or adjustable droop.
n) Circuit Breaker
Mounted on generator for protection of generator against short circuits or overloads.
o) Generator Control Panel

For monitoring all engine and generator functions, generator mounted and included in
the basic unit.
p) Fuel Oil Storage Tank

For supplying fuel oil to engine for 12 hours continuous operation (500 litre capacity)
4B Sheet 2 of 3
b. Low Voltage Main Distribution Panel
1) Panel shall be of floor standing type, steel sheet construction, factory-fabricated and
finished to sizes and dimensions shown on the Drawings or approved shop drawings.
Minimum thickness of steel sheet shall be 2 mm.
2) The panel shall include bus bar to supply power to the branch circuits as well as bus bar
for grounding.
3) Outgoing terminals shall be located at the topside of the panel and incoming terminals
adjusted to incoming cables with which suitable cable lugs shall be provided.
4) Panel components shall be of high quality products for 3-phase, 50 hertz operation at 380
volts, or 1-phase, 50 hertz operation at 220 volts as detailed in the Drawings. Panel
components to be employed for the work shall be subject to the prior approval of the
Engineer.
c. Sub-distribution Panel
1) The requirements for main distribution panel specified above shall apply for sub-
distribution panel to the extent applicable.
2) Sub-distribution panels to be installed outdoor shall be of weather-proof type, sealed and

painted.
4. INSTALLATION
a. Diesel Generator Set
Diesel generator set in generator set house shall be installed on the concrete foundation or
steel base as shown on the Drawings or approved shop drawings in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's installation instructions.
b. Low voltage main distribution panel in generator set house shall be installed as same manner
of the diesel generator set mentioned above.
c. Concrete work and metal work for foundation of these equipment shall comply with
SECTION 3A, CONCRETE and SECTION 3B, METAL WORK respectively.
d. Special care and approved measures shall be taken to prevent damage on completed adjacent
structures during installation of these equipment. Damaged structures shall be repaired or
replaced by the Contractor as instructed and to the satisfaction of the Engineer without
5. TEST
Performance test shall be performed, upon completion of the work, by the Contractor in the
presence of the Engineer in accordance with SECTION 4A, GENERAL ELECTRICAL WORK.
4B Sheet 3 of 3
SECTION 4C
LIGHTING SYSTEM
1. SCOPE
a. This Section includes internal and external lighting for all buildings, wharf lighting and street
lighting, and related works required under the Contract.
b. References
2. GENERAL
a. Lighting panel, fixture, switch, socket outlet and related cables of lighting system for
buildings shall be installed as indicated in the Drawings and as specified hereinafter.
b. Lighting panel, lighting pole, fixture and related cables of lighting system for wharf and street
shall be installed as indicated in the Drawings and as specified hereinafter.
c. Submittals

WORK.
3. LIGHTING PANEL
Lighting panel shall be totally enclosed, dust protected and vermin proof, factory fabricated to
size and dimension shown and shall be installed where indicated in the Drawings complete with
main breaker, branch breakers, neutral terminals and internal wiring between main breaker and
branch breakers.
a. The conductor for internal wiring shall be of high conductivity copper bus bars colored for
phase identification and shall be capable of carrying the load required continuously.
b. The enclosure shall be wall surface mounting type made of steel sheet with hinged door
which can be opened without any obstruction through 180 degree and fitted with a locking
device and the second cover to protect the inside wires of the panel.
c. The arrangement of the enclosure shall be such that the circuit breakers can not be operated
without opening the hinged door and it shall be necessary to remove the second cover to
obtain access to the interior of the panel.
4C Sheet 1 of 4
d. The enclosure shall be of ample size provided with wiring gutters at the sides, top and bottom
to take the maximum number of circuit cables.
e. A directory holder with clear plastic plate and metal frames shall be mounted on the inside of
each door.
4. LAMPS AND LIGHTING FIXTURE
a. Lamps and lighting fixture shall be of standard type complying with the following
requirements.
1) Fluorescent Light, TL 2 x 36 W, TL 1 x 18 W
Type : Surface mounted type, metal box, white colored
Lamp : 2 x 36 W, 1 x 18 W tubular lamp respectively
2) Down Light
Type : Semi recessed mounted type, enclosure of which inside acrylic white colored
Lamp : 60 W incandescent lamp
3) HPS 150 W
Type : Street lighting fixture to be installed to the lighting pole at approx. max. 8 m
high from the ground, aluminum alloy die-cast body and frame, high purity
aluminum reflector, deep-drawn sheet aluminum reflecting bowl.
Lamp : 150 W sodium high pressured lamp.
4) Mercury 80 W
Type : Outdoor building lamp to be installed with ceiling of entrance, Mercury type,
white.
b. Details of fixture such as shape, size and dimension shall be as shown on the Drawings or
approved shop drawings. Accessories of the fixture such as ballast, starter, capacitor, etc.,
even though not clearly shown or specified in the Drawings or the Specifications, shall be
considered to be inclusive in the items listed above and shall be furnished by the Contractor.
c. Lamps shall be delivered to the site in their original cartons and installed in the fixtures just
prior to the completion of the work.
d. Lighting fixtures shall be suitable for trouble free operation in the system voltage specified
and complete with all internal wiring.
1) Accessories for installation such as strap, mounting plates, nipples or brackets shall be
provided for proper installation.
2) All fluorescent, mercury and sodium fixture shall have the power factor not less than
85%.
4C Sheet 2 of 4
3) All fluorescent fixture shall be furnished with start gear, lamp holder and fluorescent
lamps. Diffusers of fluorescent fixtures shall be of the best quality guaranteed against
discoloration in the climatic conditions of the site.
e. Outdoor lighting fixture such as street light, flood light, parking light and obstruction light
shall be rust-proof and water-proof well sealed to prevent water from entering there from.
5. SWITCHES AND SOCKET OUTLETS
Local switches and socket outlets shall be of flush type and shall have overlapping metal plate
with rounded corners and beveled edges. Switch box and outlet box shall be of galvanized cast
iron or steel pattern with adjustable grids, except that molded plastic boxes shall be used in
corrosive atmosphere.
a. Local Switches
1) Switches shall be of flush mounting type (complete with box) with minimum capacity of
10 A, and shall be comply with BS 3676.
2) Switches shall height shall be 140 cm from the floor, unless otherwise permitted or
specified in the Drawings.
3) Unless otherwise noted, all switches shall be of white color.
b. Socket Outlets
1) Single phase socket/receptacle outlets with side earthling contacts, shall be of flush
mounting type (complete with box) and shall be comply with CEE 7 standard. Minimum
capacity of single phase socket/receptacle outlets shall be 250 V 10A/16A, unless
otherwise indicated in the Drawings.
2) Socket/receptacle outlets height shall be 140 cm from the floor, unless otherwise
permitted or specified or specified in the Drawings. Socket/receptacle outlets which shall
be placed at 30 cm from floor shall be provided with cover and shall be of waterproof
type.
3) Unless otherwise noted, all sockets shall be of white color.
6. LIGHTING POLE
a. The pole for wharf lighting and street lighting shall be galvanized steel pipe fabricated to
shape, diameter and height in factory as shown on the Drawings.
b. The pole shall be factory-painted to the finish coat of the approved color.
7. INSTALLATION
a. Cable shall be laid down or pulled into conduit in a manner specified in Sub-Section 4A-2,
CABLING AND WIRING.
4C Sheet 3 of 4
b. Ceiling mounting type fixtures shall be either tightened with bolts fastened to structural
members, or reflection shade be supported with screws. When there are masonry joints in
ceiling, installation of the fixtures shall take this consideration and shall be done flat without
leaving any space.
c. Lighting pole shall be installed plumb and securely on the concrete foundation as shown on
the Drawings. Excavation and filling, concrete work and installation of anchor bolts for
foundation shall comply with the requirements of SECTION 2C, EARTH WORK, SECTION
3A, CONCRETE and SECTION 3B, METAL WORK respectively.
d. Special care shall be taken by the Contractor in order not to damage completed wall, ceiling,
roof or deck structure during installation of lighting fixtures, switches and socket outlets.
Damages thereto shall be restored or replaced, at the contractor's expense, as directed by the
Engineer.
4C Sheet 4 of 4
SECTION 4D
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
1. SCOPE
a. This Section includes lightning arrestor and grounding as the lightning protection for the
buildings and related works required under the Contract.
b. References
2. GENERAL
a. Lightning arrestor and grounding wires for lightning protection system shall be installed on
the buildings and structures as detailed in the Drawings.
b. Submittals

WORK
3. MATERIALS
a. Air Terminal
Air terminal shall be of galvanized steel pipe screw-connected with copper spits at the end.
b. Wire
Wire shall be multiple strand copper of 70 mm2 and length shown on the Drawings.
c. Grounding Pipe
Grounding pipe shall be of galvanized steel of diameter and length shown on the drawings.
d. Gland
4. INSTALLATION
a. Air terminal shall be installed on the top of the roof of the building securely in a manner not
to be disengaged from its position by wind.
4D Sheet 1 of 2
b. Wires on the roof shall be secured 100 mm off the roof surface by galvanized steel clamps
provided at maximum 500 mm intervals.
c. Wires on the walls and floors shall be drawn into conduit. Pull boxes, either shown in the
Drawings or not, shall be provided, at the Contractor's expense, as required for drawing wire
into conduit. No joint in conduit shall be permitted.
d. Where wire is bent, radius of curvature shall be more than 6 times diameter of wire.
e. Hand hole made of concrete in size as shown on the Drawings shall be provided for junction
of wire and installation of grounding pipe.
f. Excavation and filling for installation of under-ground wire and hand hole shall comply with
SECTION 2C, EARTH WORK and concrete work and metal work for hand hole shall
comply with SECTION 3A, CONCRETE and SECTION 3B, METAL WORK respectively.
4D Sheet 2 of 2
SECTION 4E
GENERAL MECHANICAL WORK
SUB SECTION 4E-1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1. SCOPE
a. This Section sets forth general requirements applicable to all mechanical work required under
the Contract.
b. The requirements in this Section shall form a part of the following Sections.
SECTION 4H, WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
SECTION 4I, FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM
SECTION 4J, SEWERAGE AND WASTE WATER SYSTEM
c. References
DIVISION 3, BUILDING WORKS
2. GENERAL
a. The works cover all mechanical works in the project area up to the boundary of work as
shown on the Drawings excepted the pipeline for shallow well boring probably out of the
project area.
b. The works shall be executed in a neat, substantial and workman-like manner. All
workmanship shall be strictly first-class in every respect and shall be performed only by
skilled workmen.
c. All steel work shall be thoroughly cleaned by sand-blasting or giving similar and equal
treatment after all welding and fabrication is completed. Before painting, all scale, rust, oil
and grease shall be removed and treated with a rust inhibiting solution.
3. SUBMITTALS
a. Refer to SECTION 1H, SUBMITTALS
b. Equipment and Material List
As soon as practicable after signing of the Contract and before commencing work at the site,
the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a complete list of all items of
4E-1 Sheet 1 of 4
equipment and materials he proposes to use in the work, giving the name, address of the
manufacturer, trade names, ratings, capacities and full descriptions required to identify the
item. Consideration will not be given to partial lists submitted from time to time.
c. The Contractor shall submit, for approval of the Engineer, detailed working drawings
showing construction details and equipment mounting details.
d. Drawings of related or interconnected equipment shall be submitted together. Incomplete or

insufficient sets of drawings shall not be processed until all deficiencies are remedied.
e. Where due to non-availability of any material or for any other reason, the Contractor desires
to substitute another brand or type of material for the one approved, the Contractor shall
submit his application to the Engineer accompanied with the following.
1. Samples of the proposed materials with all necessary technical information
2. Detailed comparison of the properties of both items
3. Detailed price analysis of both items
4. Explicit reasons for desiring the change
a. All equipment and materials shall be new and shall conform, in every respect, with the
Specifications and Drawings. The equipment and materials shall be standard products of a
reputable manufacturer who is regularly engaged in the production of such products and
equipment that have a proven record of satisfaction for not less than 5 years, and who has
field service engineers, readily available for maintenance and operating consultation and will
provide these services as required without additional charge to the Employer.
b. All equipment and materials shall conform to the requirements of the codes and standards
specified under the various sections of the Specification or by other internationally recognized
standard institutions or testing laboratories that maintain periodic inspection of production of
listed equipment and materials, and whose listings state either that the equipment and
materials meet nationally recognized standards or have been tested and found suitable for use
in the specified manner.
c. The Engineer reserves the right to reject, even after the Contract is signed, equipment or
material submitted by the Contractor for the required services if the said equipment or
material does not comply with the requirements of the Specification, unless the Contractor
had drawn the attention of the Engineer in writing to any deviations in his offer and such
deviations were accepted at the time of adjudication, the Contractor shall be required to re-
submit other equipment or material that will comply with the Specification.
d. No order shall be placed by the Contractor for material or equipment unless written approval
of the Engineer has been obtained.
e. Whenever reference is made to a particular manufacturer's equipment or materials, such

reference shall be interpreted to imply "or approved equal".
4E-1 Sheet 2 of 4
5. LABELING
All equipment shall be provided with a name plate or label permanently attached to it in a
conspicuous position designating the service of the particular equipment. These name plates and
labels shall be of non-corrosive and non-hygroscopic material with engraved lettering in English
and of contracting colors. The inscriptions shall be approved by the Engineer.
6. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION MANUALS
The Contractor shall provide and submit 3 sets of instruction manuals for operation and
maintenance before the Employer takes over entire works covered under this specification. These
manuals shall include at least the following.
a. Manufacturer's technical catalogues, dimensional drawings and wiring diagrams for each and
every type of equipment installed
b. Operating instructions for the equipment and systems
c. Maintenance manuals for the equipment and systems
d. Spare parts list along with part numbers of various components for all equipment
e. Copies of all warranties and manufacturer's guarantee issued in respect of any equipment
supplied and installed
7. DEFECTS AND LIABILITY PERIOD
a. The Contractor shall be responsible for remedying, with all possible speed, any defects arising
from defective design, materials or workmanship, or from any act or omission of the
Contractor that may develop under the conditions provided for by the Contract and under
proper use in the works or any portion thereof within the period prescribed in the General
Condition after the works or that portion thereof, as the case may be, have been taken over.
b. Until complete handing over of the works, the Contractor shall have the right to access, at all
reasonable working hours, at his own risk and expense, by himself or his duly authorized
representatives whose names shall have previously been communicated in writing to the
Employer, to all parts of the works for the purpose of inspecting the working thereof and to
the records of the working and performance thereof for the purpose of inspecting the same
and taking notes there from, subject to the Employer's approval, which shall not be
unreasonably withheld.
The Contractor may at his own risk and expense make any tests which he considers desirable.
8. COMPLETION TEST
a. The Contractor shall give in writing a 21 days advance notice to the Engineer of the date after
which the Contractor is ready to make the completion test. Unless otherwise agreed, the tests
shall be carried out within 10 days thereafter and on such day as will be notified by the
Engineer to the Contractor.
b. Adjustment
Prior to the tests, the Contractor shall adjust all equipment and the work to ensure the proper
operation thereof and shall be solely responsible for the correctness of the same.
4E-1 Sheet 3 of 4
c. Tests
The Contractor shall carry out the specified completion tests of the works upon completion
thereof in the presence and under supervision of the Engineer. Items and method of the tests
shall be as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, etc., for carrying
out the tests. The Contractor shall submit for approval of the Engineer all data of the tests.
d. Failure of Tests
In the event that any portion of the work fails to pass the tests, the Contractor shall research
the reason of such failure and shall report on such portion or on the whole of the works, as
directed by the Engineer, within the time to be specified by the Engineer. The tests shall then
be repeated until the results are satisfactory to the Engineer.
9. SPARE PARTS
All mechanical equipment to be supplied by the Contractor under the Contract shall be
accompanied by the spare parts necessary for maintaining such equipment for two (2) years
period, unless otherwise specified in each section of the Specifications. The Contractor shall
submit the list of spare parts, for the approval of the Engineer, when he submits the shop
drawings for such equipment.
The Contractor shall guarantee that the spare parts mentioned in the list will be available with
in two (2) years to make the equipment functions well
The unit prices entered by the Contractor for items of such equipment in the Bill of Quantities
shall be considered to include cost for such spare parts.
4E-1 Sheet 4 of 4
SUB-SECTION 4E-2
PIPING
1. SCOPE
a. This Section sets forth general requirements applicable for piping work required under the
Contract.
b. Detailed specifications for materials shall be prescribed in the Specifications of respective

systems in which include piping work.
2. GENERAL
a. Unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings, the installation and testing of equipment and
materials shall conform to the requirements of the codes and standards of ASTM, API, ANSI,
NFPA, AWWA, ASME and JIS, where used in the various Sections of the Specification.
b. Moreover, all works shall comply with the following Indonesian regulations.
1) DPU regulations and codes
2) PAM's regulations and codes
3) Pedoman Plambing Indonesia (PPI)
c. The general arrangement of the piping shall be as indicated in the Drawings and
Specifications by each system. Detailed drawings of proposed departures due to actual field
conditions or other causes shall be submitted for approval. The Contractor shall carefully
examine the Drawings and shall be responsible for the proper fitting of materials and
equipment in each system as indicated, without substantial alteration. Material and equipment
installed in the piping system shall be suitable for the pressure and temperature encountered.
d. Because of the small scale of the Drawing's, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings
and accessories that may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural
and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly,
furnishing such fittings, traps, valves and accessories as may be required to meet such
conditions at no additional cost to the Employer.
e. The Contractor shall provide all necessary material and labor to connect to the piping system
all fixtures and equipment having connections, and which are specified in other Sections of
this Specification. The supply line to each item of equipment or fixture, except faucets, flush
valves or other control valves which are supplied with an integral stop shall be equipped with
a cut-off valve to enable isolation of the item for repair and maintenance without interfering
with operation of other equipment or fixtures. Supply piping to all fixtures shall be anchored
to prevent movement.
f. The work shall be carefully laid out in advance, and no excessive cutting of construction will
be permitted. Damage to buildings, wiring or equipment as a result of cutting for installation
shall be repaired by mechanics skilled in the trade involved at no additional expense to the
Employer.
4E-2 Sheet 1 of 6
g. Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. Fixtures and equipment
shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water and chemical or mechanical injury.
Upon completion of all work, the fixtures, materials and equipment shall be thoroughly
cleaned, adjusted and operated.
3. MATERIALS, FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT
a. Material, fixtures and equipment shall conform to the respective publications and as specified
in each section of the respective systems. Fixtures and equipment shall be the products of
manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products.
b. The Contractor shall submit the list of materials, fixtures and equipment as required in Sub-
Section 4G-1 herein before to the Engineer for approval.
4. STORAGE AND HANDLING
a. Pipe shall be stored not more than 4 tiers high with 3 x 30 cm wooden strips not over 1.5 m
apart between layers.
b. Every care shall be exercised in handling pipe and fitting to avoid damage to pipe or coating.
Only padded slings or flat-faced padded hooks with long narrow throat for hooking into each
end of pipe and fitting shall be used.
5. EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
Excavating, trenching and backfilling is specified in SECTION 2C, EARTH WORK. Bell holes
shall be excavated so that the entire length of the pipe will rest on soiled ground.
6. INSTALLATION OF PIPE AND FITTING
a. Placing Pipe and Fitting
Pipe and fitting shall be carried into position and not dragged. Pinch bars and tongs for
aligning or turning the pipe and fitting shall be used only on the bare ends of the pipe and
fitting. Pipe for cold water form shallow well to Elevated Water Tank is galvanized steel pipe
standard ASTM A53. Pipe in project area for cold water PVC pipe AW type, and pipe for
Saverage and waste water PVC pipe D type JIS K6741.
1) If poles are used as levers or removing skids across the trench, they shall be of wood with
broad flat faces to prevent damage to pipe coating.
2) If belt slings are used for lowering the pipe and fittings, care shall be taken so that, when
the sling is withdrawn from under the lowered pipe and fitting, the wrapping will not be
torn.
3) Where pipe and fitting are being walked on, they shall be covered with rubber mats.
4) Care shall be exercised not to allow sand, water or other foreign matter enter the pipe and
fitting, and the Contractor shall thoroughly clean the same if entered.
4E-2 Sheet 2 of 6
5) With exception of the jointing portions, all pipes and fittings shall be supported uniformly
on the beds.
b. Jointing
After the pipe has been placed in the trench or duct to the required line and grade, the
Contractor shall proceed without delay to make up each field joint as specified in AWS
D7.0/AWSD 1.1-80 and shall provide an adequate force of men and appliances to meet this
requirement.
1) Field jointing shall be by welding, flanging or coupling as shown on the Drawings or

approved shop drawings.
2) Welding shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of SECTION 3B,
METAL WORK.
3) All equipment and materials including electrodes shall be approved by the Engineer prior
to commencing the welding work.
4) Electrodes shall be kept dry, especially electrodes covered with low hydrogen shall be
dried at a temperature of approx. 300 C for at least 1 (one) hour and kept in moisture-
proofed box.
5) Surfaces to be welded shall be free from mill scale, rust, grease, paint and other foreign
material. A light film of linseed oil may like wise be disregarded. Joint surfaces shall be
free from fins and tears.
6) Temporary welding shall be minimized and, when permanent welding starts, all
temporary welds shall be removed. Special care shall be taken at the beginning of welding
to prevent starting defects. Welding shall be continuous without interruption until a layer
of welding is completed. Subsequent welding shall be started only after slag and other
foreign materials of preceding layer have been removed completely.
7) Reinforcement for weld shall be lower than 2 mm in height.
8) Defects on welding such as crack, blow hole, inclusion of slag, overlap, undercut,
irregular shape, shortage in throat depth or size, etc., shall be repaired by the Contractor
without additional cost to the Employer. In case of crack, welding shall be re-done for the
entire length of such welding which includes the crack after completely removing the
welded materials and preparing edges.
9) Undercut and shortage in throat depth shall be filled up. Finished pipeline shall be true to
line and free from twists, bends, etc.
10) Welding in locations where pipeline changes direction and where pipe cut in-site is used
shall be done after leveling the end of pipe as specified.
11) During and after completion of welding, entire weld shall be checked by an approved
method. All checking of welds thus made shall be at the expense of the Contractor.
12) After welding completed should apply immediately anti corrosive layer coating on the
surface of welding. Anti corrosive material should be approved by the Engineer and at
the expense of the Contractor.
4E-2 Sheet 3 of 6
13) Flange joint shall be made by bolt fastening. Flange face shall be free from rust, paint, oil,
grease and other foreign materials, and serrations on the flange face shall be clearly
brushed with wire brushed. Rubber gasket shall be inserted between flange faces and the
flanges shall be fastened with bolts. Bolts shall be tightened so as to distribute evenly the
stress in the bolts and after bringing the pipe in alignment.
c. Cutting of Pipe
Where necessary, cutting of pipe shall be done in a neat and workman like manner without
damage to the pipe.
1) Unless otherwise authorized, cutting shall be done by means of an approved type of

mechanical cutter. Wheel cutters shall be used when practicable.
2) Pipe shall be reamed to true internal diameter after cutting to remove burrs.
7. INSTALLATION OF VALVES
a. Valves shall be installed in locations shown on the Drawings or approved shop drawings
unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Locations of valves, however, shown on the
Drawings are approximate and exact locations shall be as approved by the Engineer.
b. Unless otherwise directed, all valves shall be installed plumb or horizontal in accordance with
the manufacturer's specifications.
c. Underground valves shall be installed in the valve box reaching to the ground surface to
facilitate operation of the valve from the ground surface by means of a valve tool. The valve
box, where required, shall be constructed as shown on the approved shop drawings.
8. PIPE SUPPORTS, HANGERS AND SLEEVES
a. All piping shall be provided with adequate supports such as shoes, cradles, inserts and
hangers as shown on the Drawings or as specified in each section of the respective systems.
The Contractor shall be responsible for their proper permanent locations.
b. Hangers and supports for horizontal piping shall be installed at intervals specified below, at
locations not more than 1 (one) m from the ends of each run out and not over 30 cm from
each change in direction of piping.
1) P.V.C. pipe shall be supported near each hub or hobbles pipe joint and at multiple fittings
as required.
2) Underground piping in project area shall be laid on a firm bed for its entire length, except
where supports is otherwise provided and shall be burried minimum 15 cm and for out
side area minimum 30 cm from top of pipe under the surface of ground.
3) All piping crossing under the road shall be buried minimum 60 cm under the surface of
sub-grade of the pavement.
c. Vertical piping shall be supported at each floor or at intervals of not than 4.5 m at not more
than 2.4 m from end the riser.
4E-2 Sheet 4 of 6
d. Pipes through concrete or masonry-unit walls or concrete floors shall be provided with pipe
sleeves fitted into place at the time of construction. The space between the pipe and wall shall
be caulked with sealant. Sleeves shall not be installed in structural members except where
indicated or approved. All rectangular and square openings shall be as detailed. Each sleeve
shall extend through its respective wall or floor, and shall be cut flush, except clamping
flanges, with each surface. Unless otherwise in dictated, sleeves shall be of such size as to
provide a minimum of 6 mm all round clearance between bare pipe and sleeves or between
jacket over insulation and sleeves.
9. PIPE IDENTIFICATION
a. Flow Arrows
Directional flow arrows of 150 mm long shall be painted on pipelines directed by the
Engineer at intervals of 30 m. The arrows shall be stenciled and painted 1 (one) coat of color
directed by the Engineer.
b. Identification
All piping located in accessible space shall be suitably identified in a manner approved by
the Engineer.
c. Valve Tag
All gate valves and control valves of which functions are not obvious shall be provided with a
non-corroding metal or laminated plastic identification tag. The tag shall indicate the service
and the area or items which the valve serves.
10. PAINTING
Painting required for pipes, hangers, supports and other iron work in concealed space and painting
of exposed items shall be applied in accordance with the applicable painting specifications in
11. TEST
Test shall include leakage tests. The duration of for the leakage test 24 (Twenty four) hour, and
the test for leakage test may be reduced to the maximum working pressure that will occur on the
portion of the line being tested.
a. After the pipeline has been laid, pipeline shall be filled with water for a minimum of 24 hours.
When, in the opinion of the Engineer, local conditions require that the trenches be backfield
immediately after the pipeline has been laid, the pressure test may be made after backfilling
has been completed but before placement of permanent paving.
b. Test shall be made only after a part of all back filling has been completed and at least 36
hours after the last concrete thrust or reaction backing has been placed with high early
strength cement, or at least 7 days after the same with standard cement. The duration of the
test shall be 24 hours unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
4E-2 Sheet 5 of 6
c. Testing Procedures
1) Each section of pipeline shall be slowly filled with water and proved that no air trapped in
the part of tested pipe and the specific test pressure shall be applied by means of a pump
connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The pump, pipe
connection and all apparatus necessary for the test including gauges shall be furnished by
the Contractor at his own expense. The Contractor shall execute all tapping and shall
furnish all necessary assistance for conducting the test.
2) The test pressure shall be minimum 1.25 of working pressure (1 Atmosphere = 1 Bar)
3) During the test, all exposed pipes, fittings, valves and joints shall be carefully examined.
To any joint at which the accumulated leakage exceeds.
d. Equipment, pipes, valves, fittings and fixtures shall be cleaned of grease, metal cuttings and
sludge that may have accumulated from operation of the system during the test. Any
stoppage, discoloration or other damage to the finish, furnishings or parts of the structure, due
to the Contractor's failure to properly clean the piping system, shall be repaired by the
Contractor without cost to the Employer.
e. The test shall supervised by the Engineer and must be proved that no leakage in piping system
exist within 24 hours.
f. All cracked or defective elements shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor without
additional cost to the Employer. The test shall then be repeated until the results are
satisfactory to the Engineer.
4E-2 Sheet 6 of 6
SECTION 4F
WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
1. SCOPE
a. This section includes materials, equipment and installation of water supply system, and
b. References

SECTION 4G, GENERAL MECHANICAL WORK
2. GENERAL
a. Contractor shall be responsible for finalization of the location and the depth for each port to
satisfy the following requirements of supply water after the trial production of the well
boring. Location of shallow well is about two hundred (200) m distance from elevated water
tank.
b. Water supply system to buildings shall consist of the following main facilities as detailed in
the Drawings.
c. Submittals
Refer to SECTION 1H, SUBMITTALS and SECTION 4G, GENERAL MECHANICAL

WORK
a. City Water Supply System (PDAM)
The underground water reservoir will be connected to the city water supply system with pipe.
The connection pipe shall be laid minimum 600 mm under ground level.
The connection pipe from existing PDAM pipeline to underground water reservoir shall be
done blue colored paint.
b. Shallow Well
The Contractor shall submit his proposal, to the Engineer for approval, of all materials and
equipment of shallow well to be drilled by the Contractor as specified hereinafter.
1) Well Casing
4F Sheet 1 of 5
Well casing shall be of high grade, butt-welded or threaded and coupled steel pipe of 100
mm conforming to JIS G 3452 or equivalent.
2) Pumps
Pumps shall be of high operating efficiency, trouble-free operation, easy of maintenance,

safe and continuous operation. Pump shall have the following performance.
Pumps for shallow well:
a) Type : Jet Pump

b) Total head : 55 m
c) Flow rate : 22 litre/min
d) Depth Shallow Well : 15 m
e) Power : 2 Kw
f) Main material : cast iron casing and bronze or cast iron impeller.
3) Accessories
Following accessories shall be included as a part of shallow well work.
a) Riser pipe including flange, gasket and bolts to support pump and connect pump to
piping system
b) Check valve to prevent reverse water flow
c) Gate valve to control pump output
d) Compound gauge to indicate discharge pressure of pump
e) Floating valve for water level control in elevated water tank.
c. Underground Water Reservoir and Elevated Water Tank
Underground water reservoir and elevated water tanks shall be of size and dimension as
shown on the Drawings.
1) Underground water reservoir of 30 m3 capacity shall be concrete material to comply with

WHO standard.
2) Materials for concrete work shall comply with SECTION 3A, CONCRETE.
d. Elevated Water Tank
Elevated Water Tank shall be of size and dimension as shown on the Drawings.
e. Pipes, Fittings and Accessories
1. Water distribution pipes 25 mm in diameter shall be galvanized electro-resistance steel

pipe conforming to ASTM A 53, grade B, standard weight, or equivalent. Pipes shall be
furnished with threaded ends for coupling joint and in sufficient length to facilitate the
system.
2. Fittings shall be of electric butt-welded fittings conforming to the requirements of

AWWA C 208 or equivalent and the material conforming to ASTM A 120 Sch. 40, or
equivalent.
3. Flanges shall be steel bolted ring type, flat face conforming to the requirements of
AWWA G 207, or equivalent.
4F Sheet 2 of 5
4. Gaskets for use on flanges shall be 3 mm thick cloth inserted rubber and shall be suitable
for either 7.5 kg/cm2 cold working pressure or greater. Rubber shall conform to ASTM D
1330, or equivalent.
5. All flange bolts and nuts shall be of steel body conforming to the requirements of ASTM
A 307, grade B, and AWWA C 207, or equivalent.
6. Piping and fitting from elevated water tank to building shall be AW type, from elevated
water tank to building main pipe dia 2” and branch pipe 1”.
f. Valves
1. Gate Valves
a. Gate valves 50 mm in diameter and smaller shall be of copper alloy body, manually
operated and outside screw type. Valves shall be rated for 10 kg/cm2 cold working
pressure.
b. Valves larger than 65 mm in diameter shall be of flanged or threaded ends with flat
face conforming to AWWA C 500 and valves smaller than 50 mm in diameter shall
be of threaded ends for coupling joint
c. Gate valves for blow-off or drainage shall be supplied with square operating nut.
d. All valves shall be closed by turning clockwise. When valves are opened, the clear
waterway opening shall be equal to the nominal diameter of the pipes.
e. Valves pressure rating shall be permanently marked on the body either grooved or
embossed.
2. Float valves to be installed in the elevated water tank shall be of gray iron body, straight
type. The rating pressure shall be 10 kg/cm2. Float shall be of brass plate conforming to
ASTM B 36, No. 210 or equivalent, and the float stem shall be of galvanized steel pipe
conforming to ASTM A 53, type F, standard weight or equivalent.
g. Water Distribution Pumps
1) Water pumps distributing treated water from under-ground water reservoir to elevated
water tank and to buildings shall be electric motor driven centrifugal end suction pump
complete with fittings, valves and accessories, and shall have the following performance.
a. Type : Centrifugal Pumps

b. Total head : 20 m head
c. Flow rate : 100 litre/min
d. Output : 300 w
e. Main material : Cast iron (body), stainless steel (shaft) and bronze
impeller.
2) Components of pumps shall conform to the following requirements.
a. Casing shall be of gray cast iron body conforming to the requirements of ASTM A
48, class 30 or equivalent. Casing shall have smooth internal surface and spiral type
4F Sheet 3 of 5
waterway. The dimensions of inlet and outlet flanges shall conform to AWWA or
equivalent.
b. Impeller shall be of bronze and statically balanced, and shall have good suction
performance, high efficiency, low noise and low vibration performance.
c. Shaft shall be of stainless steel conforming to JIS G 4304, SUS 304 or equivalent, and
shall have sufficient strength and accuracy for successful operation under high speed
operation.
d. Shaft sealing shall be by two gland packing provided at both inside and outside and a
lantern ring provided between these two packings. Bronze sleeve shall be provided
between these two packings.
e. Deep grove type ball bearing shall be provided in the support bearing so as to bear the
radial and thrust loads.
f. Flexible coupling shall be of gray cast iron body conforming to ASTM A 48, class 30
or equivalent, and provided with rubber element to transfer the rotation of motor shaft
to the pump shaft. Flexible coupling shall be installed accurately in alignment to as to
transfer the rotation smoothly and efficiently.
g. Water seal shall be mechanical type.
3) Accessories
Following accessories shall be included as a part of shallow well work.
4) Each water supply pump shall be supplied with the following accessories.
a. Common base
b. Foundation bolts and nuts
c. Flexible coupling with bolts
d. Compound gauge with gauge cook
e. Pressure gauge with gauge cook
f. Motor valve, 1 KW, 380 V, 3 Phase
g. Check valve, rapid closing type
h. Foot valve
i. Starter with ammeter
5) Motor shall be horizontal shaft induction motor for operation at 380 V, 50 hertz service.
4. INSTALLATION
a. Elevated Water Tank Reservoir
Elevated water tank shall be completed with steel support as indicated on the drawings.
Tank shall be made from Plastic material.
b. Pipes
Pipes including fittings and accessories, valves, outlets, and all related piping materials
shall be installed in accordance with SECTION 4G, GENERAL MECHANICAL WORK.
4F Sheet 4 of 5
4F Sheet 5 of 5
5. STERILIZATION OF PIPELINE
a. Before being placed on service, the entire line shall be chlorinated. Chlorination shall be done
by men who have had experienced with chlorine.
1. Chlorine shall be applied by calcium hypo chloride and water mixture.
2. Water shall be fed slowly into new line with chlorine applied in amounts to produce a
dosage of 40 to 50 ppm and retained in the line for at least 3 hours.
3. A residual of not less than 5 ppm shall be produced in all parts of the line.
4. During the chlorination process, all valves and accessories shall be opened.
5. After chlorination, the water shall be flushed from the line at its extremities until the
replacement water tests are equal chemically and bacteriological to those of the
permanent source of supply.
b. Chemicals and Solutions
1. Calcium hypo chloride shall be comparable to commercial products known as H.T.H,

Perch Loren, and Maxochlor.
2. A solution consisting of 5% of powder to 95% of water by weight should be prepared.

The calcium hypo chloride and water mixture, first made into a paste and then thinned to
a slurry, shall be injected or pumped into the newly laid line under the conditions
specified herein-before.
6. TEST
Hydrostatic Test
Hydrostatic test of pipeline shall be performed upon completion of the installation work but
before commencing the painting work in accordance with the applicable requirements of
SECTION 4G, GENERAL MECHANICAL WORK.
7. FINISHES
Painting of pipelines including fittings and accessories and any other metal surfaces which have
not received factory- painted finishes, and metal surfaces damaged during erection or fabrication
shall be applied in accordance with the requirements of SECTION 3H, FINISHES.
4F Sheet 6 of 5
SECTION 4G
FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM
1. SCOPE
a. This section includes materials and installation of fire fighting system, and related works
b. Reference
SECTION 4E, GENERAL MECHANICAL WORK
2. GENERAL
a. Fire fighting system shall consist of fire extinguishers as shown on the Drawings.
b. All accessories or attachments of above facilities necessary to facilitate the system shall be
included and provided by the Contractor even though not specifically shown on the Drawings
or not specified herein.
d. Submittals.
Refer to SECTION 1H, SUBMITTALS and SECTION 4E, GENERAL MECHANICAL
WORK.
- Fire Extinguishers
Fire extinguishers shall comply with the following requirements.
Type : Multi purpose dry chemical
Weight (kg) : 4.5

Powder weight (kg) : 3.0
Height (cm) : 50.0
Shooting range (m) : 7.0
4. INSTALLATION
Fire extinguishers shall be installed according to the following schedule. Appropriate type of
fixing and fastening devices to prevent installed fire extinguishers from falling down shall be
provided in a manner approved by the Engineer.
5. FINISHES
Painting of pipelines including fittings and accessories and all metal surfaces not factory-painted
shall be applied in accordance with SECTION 3H, FINISHES.
4G Sheet 1 of 2
SECTION 4H
SEWERAGE AND WASTE WATER SYSTEM
1. SCOPE
a. This Section includes material, equipment and installation of sewerage and sanitation system,
b. References
SECTION 3I, SPECIALTIES
SECTION 4E, GENERAL MECHANICAL WORK
2. GENERAL
a. Sewerage and waste water systems shall consist of toilet and lavatory fixtures, pipings, septic
tanks, absorption system, vent pipes, and manholes including all accessories as shown on the
Drawings.
b. Submittals
Refer to SECTION 1H, SUBMITTALS and SECTION 4E, GENERAL MECHANICAL

WORK.
3. MATERIALS
a. Materials for toilet and lavatory fixtures shall be as specified in SECTION 3I,
SPECIALTIES.
b. P.V.C. pipes and fittings shall conform to ASTM D 3033 or D 3034, or equivalent.
c. Materials for concrete for septic tank, absorption system and manhole shall conform to the
requirements of SECTION 2E, CONCRETE.
d. Metal covers for septic tank and manhole and other miscellaneous steel work shall comply
with the requirements of SECTION 2G, METAL WORK.
e. Sample of palm fiber and asphalt paper for absorption system shall be submitted by the
Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
4H Sheet 1 of 3
4. INSTALLATION
a. Septic Tank
1) Septic tank shall be constructed at locations and in dimensions as shown on the Drawings.
2) Excavation and backfilling before and after installation of septic tank shall be performed
as specified in SECTION 2C, EARTH WORK.
3) Concrete work shall be carried out in accordance with SECTION 2E, CONCRETE.
Placing foundation rubble stone, lean concrete and structural concrete shall be carried out
in dry condition. Approved means to exclude ground water from excavated trench shall
be provided when performing such works. Backfilling shall not be made until placed
structural concrete shows specified concrete strength.
b. Absorption System
1) Earth work and concrete work shall be carried out according to the requirements for
septic tank specified above.
2) Approved sand shall be spread and compacted on the excavated trench and gravel shall be
laid and compacted up to the bottom level of P.V.C. pipes.
3) P.V.C. pipes with openings on wall shall be installed on compacted gravel. Diameter and
ratio of openings per surface area of pipe shall be as approved by the Engineer.
4) Gravel, palm fiber and backfilling material shall be laid or filled on P.V.C. pipes in each
layer thickness shown on the Drawings.
5) Locations, types, sizes and details of absorption system shall be as shown on the
Drawings.
c. Pipes, Fittings and Accessories
1) Pipes shall be installed in the location and the elevation as shown on the Drawings,
approved shop drawings or in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer.
2) Pipes shall be protected during handling against impact and free fall and the pipe interior
shall be free of extraneous materials.
3) Pipe laying shall be proceeded upgrade with the spigot ends of bell-and-spigot pipe and
tongue ends of tongue-and-groove pipe pointing in the direction of the flow. Each pipe
shall be laid accurately to the line and grade shown on the Drawings or approved shop
drawings. Pipes shall be axis and centered so that the sewer has a uniform invert. As the
work progressed, the interior of the sewer shall be cleaned of all superfluous materials.
4) Before making pipe joints, all surfaces of the positions of the pipe to be joined shall be
clean and dry. Lubricants, primers and adhesives shall be used as recommended by the
pipe manufacturer. The joints shall then be placed, fitted, joined and adjusted so as to
obtain the degree of water tightness required.
5) The packing material shall be well packed into the annular space so as to prevent the
entrance of lead into the pipes. The remainder of the space shall be filled with molten lead
4H Sheet 2 of 3
that is hot enough to show a rapid change in color when stirred. Scum shall be removed
before pouring. The lead shall be calked to form a tight joint without over straining the
bell and shall have a minimum depth of 25 mm after calking.
6) Trenches shall be kept free of water and as dry as possible during bedding, laying and
jointing and for as ling a period as required. When work is not in progress, open ends of
pipes and fittings shall be satisfactorily closed so that no trench water or other material
will enter the pipes or fittings. Caps and plugs used temporarily for closing open ends of
pipes shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
7) As soon as possible after the joint is made, sufficient backfill material shall be placed
along the pipe to prevent pipe movement off line of grade.
8) If the maximum width of the trench at the top of the pipes, as specified in SECTION 2C,
EARTH WORK, is exceeded for any reason other than by direction, the Contractor shall
install at no additional cost to the Employer such concrete cradling, pipe placement or
other bedding as may be required to satisfactorily support the added load of the backfill.
9) Joints between different pipe materials shall be made as herein before specified using
approved jointing materials.
6. LEAKAGE TEST
Lines shall be subject to the leakage test by either infiltration method or infiltration method as
appropriate and as approved by the Engineer.
a. Prior to testing for leakage, the trench shall be backfilled up to at least the lower half of the
pipe. If required, sufficient additional backfill shall be placed to prevent pipe movement
during testing. The joints shall be left uncovered to permit inspection.
b. When the water table is 60 cm or more above the top of the pipe at the upper end of the
pipeline section to be tested, infiltration shall be measured using a suitable weir or other
device acceptable to the Engineer. When the Engineer determines that infiltration cannot be
properly tested, an infiltration test shall be made by filling the line to be tested with water so
that a head of at least 60 cm is provided above both the water table and the top of the pipe at
the upper end of the pipeline to be tested.
c. The filled line shall be allowed to stand until the pipe has reached its maximum absorption,
but not less than 4 hours. After absorption, the head shall be re-established. The amount of
water required to maintain this water level during a two-hour test period shall be measured.
d. Leakage as measured by either the infiltration test or infiltration test shall not exceed 1.5 liter
per 25 mm diameter per 30 m of pipeline per hour. When leakage exceeds the maximum
amount specified, satisfactory corrections shall be made and retesting accomplished. Visible
leaks encountered shall be corrected regardless of leakages test results. Testing, correction
and retesting shall be made by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Employer.
4H Sheet 3 of 3
SECTION 5
NAVIGATION AIDS
1. SCOPE
a. This section includes navigation aids (harbor lamp and light beacon, etc) and related works
required under the Contract. Scope of work for Jetty of PT. Soma Daya Utama are as follows
:
b. The Contractor responsible to get approval from Navigation Division due to the work and
location of Harbour Lamps and Marker Pile and/or other Navigation Aids
c. References
- SECTION 2D, PILING

- SECTION 2E, CONCRETE
- SECTION 2G, METAL WORKS
- SECTION 2L, FINISHES
- SECTION 4A, GENERAL ELECTRICAL WORKS
2. GENERAL SPECIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT
a. General
1] All equipment shall be continuous rating and tropical proof type which shall stand to
protect them under tropical environment such as high temperature, high humidity and
intense sun light. All equipment shall be withstand the wind-velocity of 56 m/sec,
which has been standardized by purchaser for designing of marine aids to navigation.
2] All equipment shall be fully tropical zed and suitable for working in room temperature
of 0° C to 50° C with a relative humidity of up to 100% without any degradation in
performance and reliability, and shall be treated with fungicide except otherwise
specified. All metal surface shall be treated against corrosion all large opening shall be
fitted with a screen to prevent insects from entering.
3] All electrical equipment shall be solid stated as far as possible and minimum use shall
be made of discrete components. The equipment shall be preferable be of plug in
modular design. All necessary cables, contractor’s and materials for a complete
installation shall be supplied together with the equipment and their cost included
therein.
4] Adequate Means shall be provided for indoor alit ventilation of the equipment to
prevent overheating.
5 Sheet 1 of 16
5] The design, workmanship, materials and finish of all parts of the equipment shall be in
accordance with good engineering practice and where applicable, conform with the
appropriate safety regulations or internationally accepted industrial standards, such as :
1. Peraturan Umum Instalasi Listrik (PUIL)
2. Peraturan Umum Instalasi Penangkal Petir (PUIPP)
3. Japanese Industrial Standard (JIS)
4. International Electro technical Communication (IEC)
5. Verband Deutschen Electrotechniker (VDE)
6. Standard Industri Indonesia (SII)
7. British Standard (BS)
Performance and characteristics pertaining to the communication equipment shall meet

the latest articles, regulations and recommendations where applicable, regardless of
references made in this documents.
6] Commonly used parts shall be used as much as possible, in order to simplify

maintenance and trouble shooting.
7] Thyristor shall be used as switching device for the charging controller for the power
supply system, especially the light buoy.
8] Materials used in the equipment shall be incombustible to an extent possible.
9] Capacitors, inductors and resistors shall have necessary items marked such as values,
tolerance, and working voltage.
10] Contract between aluminum and steel shall be protected with a bituminous or zinc
chrome based paint.
11] Efforts shall be made to reduce electrochemical corrosion efforts between different
materials. Especially, emerged parts shall be taken care for corrosion.
12] Operating voltage shall be shown on the equipment.
13] Equipment’s made from metal shall be grounded appreciate method separating lighting
protection.
14] Machines, instruments and tools of workshop installation shall be in compliance with
ISO or JIS.
15] Ten hours rate shall be applied for capacity of battery at 1.85 volts of final voltage per
cell.
16] Complete set of anchor bolts and gauge plate (template) for GRP light tower and so on
shall be supplied as a part accessories specified in the Technical Specifications.
b. Requirements of Materials and Parts
1] The materials to be used shall be in compliance with SNI, JIS, BS, DIN or equivalent
internationals standards.
5 Sheet 2 of 16
2] Frame, roof and floor of lantern house shall use non-corrosive materials.
3] Frame, retainer, roof, gauzed ventilation and burette segment of lantern house shall use
non-corrosive materials.
4] For the lantern house, permanence and strength are combined by careful selection of
appropriate non-corrosive materials.
5] Lens and optical components shall use optical glass and/or acrylics.
6] Main parts of radar reflector shall be made of aluminum.
7] Materials of top mark shall be light weight and non-corrosive.
8] Hull material of buoy body shall used mild steel, which should be 8 mm in thickness, or
more.
9] As for superstructure of buoy, angle steel materials shall be used.
10] Balance weight of buoy shall be cast iron.
11] Mooring system shall be made of appropriate steel, except sinker.
12] Sinker shall be of reinforced concrete.
c. Requirement for Mechanical Processing
1] Enclosure, chassis and so on shall be made of adequate materials and designed to have
sufficient strength.
2] Install a stopper on the drawer construction panel.
3] Set up the protection board indicating danger in any area handing high voltage.
4] As a rule, construction shall be such that it is possible to carry out the maintenance
checks from the front and side of the enclosure.
5] A stopper shall be installed in the door, so that will not open more than a specific angle.
6] When installing the units, and parts with screws, spring washers shall be used.
Loosing shall also be prevented by the use of locking paint and so on.
7] Fuse installation point shall be where the maintenance check and replacement can be
carried out.
8] Internal wiring of units shall be colored systematically in order to simply the

maintenance check.
5 Sheet 3 of 16
9] All equipment, parts of units, etc., shall be given careful consideration, in order to case
the maintenance check and adjustment. Drawer construction panel shall be designed to
be able to replace all panel easily.
10] On the terminal for adjustment and check, content shall be indicated.
11] Replacement and connection parts such as connector, act. Shall be indicated their
contents not to connect in a wrong way.
12] For operation boards for main power supply, some measures shall be taken to prevent
them from connecting or in connecting mistakenly.
13] Countermeasure shall be taken for thief on equipment of buoys.
14] Rating voltage of lamps for the development of Marine Aids to Navigation shall be
standardized to 12V DC, and input voltage for the lighting equipment shall be either
12V DC or 24V DC nominal.
d. Solar Power System
1] The capacity of batteries shall be high enough to continue functioning without charging
as long as 20 days in case of inclement weather and other adverse condition.
2] The bidder shall submit the calculation document described above with design sheets
for solar power supply system.
e. Working Life
The equipment shall be designed and constructed to five an operational life of at least fifteen
(15) years continuous services. The Contractor shall state in the instruction and maintenance
manual for equipment what maintenance procedures are required for maintenance of such a
service. Rated life of lamp shall be, 1,000 hr or more.
f. Name Plate
1] The main equipment shall have the name plates on the places easily visible, which shall
be indicated in the Approval Documents.
2] The name plate shall include the following :
1. Name of Equipment
2. Type of Equipment
3. Main Ratings
4. Serial number
5. Month and year of manufacture and name of manufacturer
3] The shape of above name plate shall be properly sized. The marking shall be in English
and Indonesian.
5 Sheet 4 of 16
4] The measuring and test instruments shall have name plate indicating the name, type and
other necessary items, properly shaped and sized.
g. Marking for the inner Part Equipment
1] All marking for the inner part of equipment shall be in English and Indonesian. Each
bay shall have their relevant type, model and serial number durably marked thereon.
2] All marking the inner of equipment shall be ready visible without displacing any
component or wiring except that the marking of component of units or sub-units which
normally removed from the equipment for the test or repair need only be visible when
such units or sub-units are removed.
3] Fuse position shall be marked to show the rating of the fuses fitted. All controls shall be
clearly designated in English and Indonesian.
h. Surface Color
Coloring for the off-shore light beacons shall meet IALA BUOY AGE SYSTEM
GUIDELINE.
i. Wiring and Cabling
1] All wiring and cabling within the equipment shall be of adequate size and rating, neatly
arrange and adequately supported to minimize the risk of mechanical damage during
installation, operation or carrying out of normal maintenance operation.
2] All wires shall be neatly terminated on the apparatus to give a good mechanical and
electrical connection.
3] Precaution shall be taken within the equipment to prevent danger to personnel from
contact with parts of the equipment carrying main voltage.
j. Joint and Connection
1] Structure of antenna mast shall be hot-dip galvanized steel and bolt connection type or
equipment.
2] High power transmitter stage shall be fully over load protection.
3] As for GRP light tower of light beacon, joint shall be internal bolted and make sure to
seal for water-tight.
k. Welding
Welding work shall be done in compliance with SNI 07-3027-1992, 07-3029 and 07-3026-
1992, JIS or equivalent International standards.
l. Galvanization
5 Sheet 5 of 16
1] Hot-dip galvanization shall be for steel structure, bolts and nuts in compliance with SNI,
JIS or equivalent international standards. Electric plating is not allowed.
2] Measurement of galvanization thickness shall be made in compliance with SNI, JIS, BS,
DIN, or equivalent international standards, and the results shall be submitted to the
Employer and Engineer.
3] Hot-dip galvanization shall have minimum 500 grams per square meters of zinc coating.
m. Protection
1] Adequate automatic and interlocked power protection shall be provided by both

mechanical and electrical means for high power equipment
2] High power transmitter stage shall be fully over load protection.
3] Lighting protector and grounding system of better performance shall be provided at the
relevant signal inputs and outputs of all the equipment supplied which are accessible to
lighting.
n. Prior approval
1] Contractor shall submit the Approval Document for the equipment to the Employer and
the Engineer for approval within two (2) months prior the commencement of
manufacturing the equipment, whichever earlier.
2] Notification shall be made by the Employer in writing to the Contractor on the result
within two (2) months after receipt of the submission thereof.
o. Composition of System and Equipment
The unit for the number of equipment and/or unit of the system composition and the
equipment composition described in TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT
shall be supplied ‘each’ unless otherwise specified.
p. General of Tender Specifications
The proposed system shall be considered on the following points :

1] System performance and operational function.
2] Local contents and after sales care capability.
3. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CIVIL WORKS AND INSTALLATION
a. Provision of materials, etc.
1] Contractor shall provide all materials, tools, plant, transportation and anything else
necessary for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract.
5 Sheet 6 of 16
2] Contractor shall employ an adequate work force to complete the work satisfactorily
within the time specified in the Contract.
b. Bench Mark
The bench mark for the civil, housing and installation works shall be installed at the proper
position in the Site prior to commencement of the civil works, and maintained until the
issuance of Acceptance Certificate by the Purchaser.
c. Transportation of the Goods
Contractor shall provide all transportation necessary for safe movement of the equipment and
materials from Contractor’s country to the ports of destination and to the Sites in proper
manner.
d. Delivery and Storage of Equipment and Materials
1] During the time interval from the delivery of equipment and materials up to the
commencement of installation, storage thereof shall be at Contractor’s responsibility.
2] Contractor shall be responsible for loading and unloading, as well as handling of any
equipment and material at all stage up to the final Acceptance.
3] Contractor shall be responsible for unpacking, identification and checking of the

equipment and materials and relevant invoices or other shipping documents.
4] Handling and storage of any goods at the Sites shall be the responsibility of Contractor.
e. Installation Requirements
1] Grounding
All tower and equipment shall be connected with adequate grounding system. Earthling
resistance shall be less than 5 ohms.
2] Measurement of Earth Resistance
Upon completion of installation work, Contractor shall measure the grounding

resistance and submit the result to the Employer and the Engineer.
3] Lightning Protection
a) Lighting conductor shall be copper and earthling conductor section area shall be 60
mm2, or more and grounding resistance shall be less than 4 ohms.
b) Protecting angle of lighting rod is supposed to be 45 degree and lighting rod shall
be mounted on light tower. Light tower and other equipment shall be installed
within its protecting angle.
5 Sheet 7 of 16
c) At the receiving point of commercial power supply, anti-lighting transformer shall
be installed, where applicable.
4] Safety
Contractor shall pay most careful attention to the safety of his own staff and his Sub-
contractors, as well as the safety of the third parties.
5] Wiring and Cabling
a) All wiring and cabling within the housing shall be of adequate size and rating,
neatly arranged and adequately supported to minimize the risk of mechanical and
electrical damage during installation, operation or carrying out of normal
maintenance operations.
b) All wires shall be neatly terminated on the apparatus to give a good mechanical and
electrical connection.
c) Prevention shall be taken to prevent danger to personnel from contract with parts
the equipment carrying main voltage.
d) All interconnecting wires and cables inside the light tower, building and housing
shall be carried on/in cables racks, trenches and/or ducts.
e) Under grounding cables shall be buried 1 m or deeper and protected by Efflux pipe.
f) Over-head cabling, if any, shall be supported by steel taper poles, 5 m or higher

from ground level, with the maximum distance of 25 m per span.
g) High voltage and low voltage conductors shall be physically separated so as to

protect personnel from accidental high voltage contact.
h) Conductors carrying power, control supervisory, audio IF and radio signal currents
shall be arranged to avoid interference.
i) Earthling Conductor for the Lighting Protection System shall be separated in 1.0 m
or more from other cables and wires.
j) Leader, pipe and so on made of metal within 1 m of the earthling conductor for the
lighting protection system shall be grounded.
k) Earthling Plates shall be buried more than 1 m below the ground level (G.L.) at top
edge of earthling plates in vertical.
l) The lighting earthling conductor shall be lain down and isolated with insulator
from the light tower and lantern house, and its radius curvature is in 200 mm, or
more.
6] Piping
5 Sheet 8 of 16
Fuel pipes between the service tank and both the diesel engine and main fuel tank shall
be properly protected by the concrete trenches.
7] Cables and Wires Layout
a) The cables and wires in the equipment rooms shall be properly protected by ducts
or trench.
b) The cables and wires from housing to housing and from housing to mast, etc. shall
be properly protected by the efflux tubes or concrete cable trench.
8] Sealing against Dust and Water for Light Tower and/or Buoy
Opening made in the light tower and/or buoy for passage of cable dust and so on shall
be sealed to prevent ingress of dust and water after installation of relevant equipment.
f. Installation of Equipment
1] Facilities shall be tightly fixed to the base and horizontal level correction is made with
adjusting screws or liners.
2] Especially, the lantern shall be checked accurate focusing of the lamp filament.
3] Installation shall be made not to cause interference between equipment to be co sited.
4] Wiring Method
a) All wiring shall be laid upon cable rack or within cable duct or trench, pressed
terminal and indication tag shall be attached at each cable end.
b) City polyethylene cable shall be laid upon wiring holder built in outdoor portion.
5] Light Source
a) The light source shall be in the vertical line of center of cross section of light tower
for the lighthouses and beacons, and superstructure for the light buoys.
b) The center height of light source for the lighthouses and light beacon, L- & M-
types shall be placed at the center of the cross section at the half height of glazing
of lantern house.
g. Measurement of Light Position
The measurement of the light position shall be made before the Acceptance Test, and the
results shall be submitted to the Employer and the Engineer.
h. Operation Test
5 Sheet 9 of 16
The operation test shall be made for both the equipment and system basis, and its data shall
be prepared before the Acceptance Test.
i. Tower Installation for GRP Light Tower and Antenna Mast
1] Tower installation shall included all the works necessary for installation of their
foundation.
2] Foundation Work
The foundation of tower shall be constructed to have sufficient strength to withstand

against external end gravity loads. When applying the anchor bolts for tower
foundation, position of anchor bolts shall be set by gauge plate so as the bolt position
will not move when concrete pouring.
4 LOCATION AND QUANTITY
Location of installation of navigation aids shall refer to the Contract Drawing (Volume IV) and
the quantity of harbor lamp and light beacon to be supplied shall also refer to Contract Drawing.
5. COMPOSITION OF EQUIPMENT
a. The navigation equipment consists of:
Quantity
Location
Harbor Lamp
1. Lighting Equipment 1 set

2. Radar Reflector 1 set
3. Lightning Protection System 1 set
4. Power Supply System 1 set
5. Light Tower 1 set
Total
b. Each equipment shall comprise the followings:
1] Lighting Equipment for harbor lamp.
Item Quantity
1) Lantern 1 unit
Consisting of : 1 each
a. Lantern 1 each
5 Sheet 10 of 16
b. Lens 1 set
c. Lamp 1 set
d. Lamp changer 1 each
e. Lantern Base 1 set
f. Accessories 1 set
g. Consumable spares for 5 years
2) Controller 1 unit
Consisting of :
a. Control Unit 1 each
b. Sun Switch 1 each
c. Accessories 1 set
d. Consumable spares for 5 years 1 set
2] Radar Reflectors for harbor lamp
Item Quantity
1) Radar Reflectors 1 set
Consisting of :
a. Radar Reflector Elements 1 set
b. Accessories 1 set
3] Lightning Protection System for harbor lamp
Item Quantity
1) Lightning Protection System 1 set
Consisting of :
a. Lighting Rod 1 each
b. Earthling Conductor 1 set
c. Two (2) sheets of Earthling Plates 1 set
d. Accessories 1 set
4] Power Supply System for harbor lamp
Item Quantity
1) Solar Array 1 unit
5 Sheet 11 of 16
Consisting of :
a) Solar Modules 1 set
b) Accessories 1 set
2) Solar Array Frame 1 set
Consisting of :
a) Frame elements 1 set
3) Charging Controller 1 each
Consisting of :
a) Charging Control Unit 1 set
c) Consumable Spares for 5 years 1 set
4) Battery 1 unit
Consisting of :
a) Battery Cells 1 set
c) Consumable Spares for 5 years 1 set
5] Light Tower for harbor lamp
Item Quantity
1) Light Tower 1 unit
Consisting of :
a) GRP Light Tower Segments 1 set
b) Accessories (ladder, door, ventilation, 1 set
etc.)
6. REQUIREMENTS OF EQUIPMENT
Each equipment shall be specified as follows:
a. Lighting Equipment for harbor lamp, light beacon and light buoy
Item Quantity
1) Lantern
5 Sheet 12 of 16
a. Optical Requirements
i) Light Character
Harbor Lamp Fl.W.(2) 5s (0.5 + 0.5 + 0.5 + 3.5)
ii) Luminous Range

Harbor Lamp 12.0 Nautical Miles or more (T=0.74)
iii) Effective Intensity

Harbor Lamp 3600 Cd or more
iv) Type of Lens Fresnel Drum Lens
v) Focusing Marks 2 pairs
vi) Estimated Diameter of Lens 250 mm to 300 mm
b. Electrical Requirements 12 V DC or 24 V DC Nominal

10 V to 16 V DC or better for 12 V DC or
i Input Voltage 20 V to 32 V DC or better for 24 V DC
ii Operating Voltage 12 V DC, 100 W or less, Halogen
Motor or electro magnetic driven
iii Rating & Type of Lamp
iv Driving Method of Lamp
changer
Water Proof
c. Mechanical Requirements 6 Positions
i) Protection
ii) No. of Lamp position of
Lamp changer
2) Controller
a) Electrical Requirements 12 V DC or 24 V DC nominal
i) Input Voltage
- Bulb 10 V DC or 16 V DC or better for 12 V DC
- Harbor Lamp or 20 V to 32 V DC or better for 24 V DC
ii) Operating Voltage 1 W, or less
To be adjustable by flasher at site
iii) Power Consumption
iv) Light Character
Bulkhead type or built in lantern
b) Mechanical Requirements
i) Mount Type
5 Sheet 13 of 16
b. Radar Reflector for harbor lamp
Item Quantity
1) Electrical Requirement
a) Radar Cross Section 100 m2, or more at the X Band
2) Mechanical Requirements
a) Material of radar Reflector Elements Aluminium alloy or equivalent

b) Structure Trihedical-type
c) Alignment Every 45 degrees
c. Lightning Protection System for harbor lamp
Item Quantity
1) Electrical Requirement
i) Earth Resistance 4 ohm, or less

ii) Cross Section Area of Earthling 60 mm2, or more
Conductor
a) Diameter or Lightning Rod 12 mm ф, or more

b) Radius Curvature of Earthling 200 mm, or more
Conductor 25 m
c) Estimated Length of Earthling
Conductor 1 m x 1 m and t = 1.5 mm, or more
d) Estimated Size of Earth Plate
e) Material Copper
i) Lighting Rod Copper
ii) Earthling Conductor Copper
iii) Earth Plate
d. Power Supply System for harbor lamp.
Item Quantity
1) Solar Array
5 Sheet 14 of 16
a. Electrical Requirements
i) Solar Cell
a. Type Silicon Mono-crystal

b. Fill Factor 0.7, or better
c. Estimated Conversion 13%, or better at 1 KW/m2 of
Efficiency irradiance and
25°C of cell Temperature
100 mega-ohm, or more
b. Mechanical Requirements
i) Module structure Encapsulation type
2) Solar Array Frame
i) Materials Hot-dip-galvanized Angle

Steel, or stainless steel
ii) Tilt Angle 15 degrees
iii) Protection Bird Spikes
3) Charging Controller
a. Electrical Requirements
i) Protection function Over Voltage, Over Current,

and Reserve Current
ii) Check Terminal Open circuit voltage, Short
circuit current and Battery
voltage
iii) Meters DC Voltage and Current
b. Mechanical Requirements
i) Mount Type Bulkhead type
4) Battery
a. Electrical
i) Type Sealed Lead Acid Battery

ii) Estimated Capacity Minimum 400 AH for 12 V
DC or minimum 200 AH for
24 V DC
5 Sheet 15 of 16
e. Light Tower for harbor lamp
Item Quantity
a. Material Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic

b Gel Coat Thickness (GRP) 0.3 mm, or more
c Structure Molded segment/Flange
Connection and with
mounting base for lantern,
radar Reflector, Solar Array
Frame, Lighting Rod,
Lighting Earth Conductor,
Charging Controller and
Battery Container
d. Coloring
- Harbor Lamp White
e. Height of Light Tower
- Harbor Lamp 10 m from top to bottom
f. Estimated Diameter of Light Tower
1. For Base 1.5 m to 2.5 m

2. For Body 1.0 m to 2.0 m
g. Thickness
1. For Wall for Base Min. 20 mm, or more

2. For Wall for Body Min. 8 mm, or more
h. Ladder
1. Inside Fixed type (Galvanized steel,

or equivalent)
2. Outside (including ladder for foundation) Removable type (Galvanized
steel, or equivalent)
i. Door Lockable (Galvanized steel,

or equivalent)
j. Air Vents Goose neck type or Screen

louvers (Galvanized steel, or
equivalent)
5 Sheet 16 of 16
k. Type of Top mark
- Harbor Lamp Sphere x 2 (Black)
5 Sheet 17 of 16

Spesifikasi Teknik PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Spesifikasi Teknik PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PROJECT OWNER

PT. SOMA DAYA UTAMA

CONTRUCTION of UNLOADING COAL

KARIMUN BESAR ISLAND

PT. TRACTUS MULTI SERVICES

SHEET NO. DRAWING NO.

CONTRUCTION of UNLOADING COAL

KARIMUN BESAR ISLAND

PT. TRACTUS MULTI SERVICES

SHEET NO. DRAWING NO.

PT. SOMA DAYA UTAMA

KARIMUN BESAR ISLAND

400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400

PT. TRACTUS MULTI SERVICES

400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400

PLAN AND CROSS SECTION

SHEET NO. DRAWING NO.

PT. SOMA DAYA UTAMA

KARIMUN BESAR ISLAND

PT. TRACTUS MULTI SERVICES

PLAN AND CROSS SECTION

SHEET NO. DRAWING NO.

PT. SOMA DAYA UTAMA

KARIMUN BESAR ISLAND

PT. TRACTUS MULTI SERVICES

PLAN AND CROSS SECTION

SHEET NO. DRAWING NO.

PT. SOMA DAYA UTAMA

CONTRUCTION of UNLOADING COAL

KARIMUN BESAR ISLAND

PT. TRACTUS MULTI SERVICES

PLAN AND CROSS SECTION

SHEET NO. DRAWING NO.

PT. SOMA DAYA UTAMA

CONTRUCTION of UNLOADING COAL

KARIMUN BESAR ISLAND

PT. TRACTUS MULTI SERVICES

PLAN AND CROSS SECTION

SHEET NO. DRAWING NO.

PT. SOMA DAYA UTAMA

CONTRUCTION of UNLOADING COAL

KARIMUN BESAR ISLAND

PT. TRACTUS MULTI SERVICES

PLAN AND CROSS SECTION

PT. SOMA DAYA UTAMA

CONTRUCTION of UNLOADING COAL

KARIMUN BESAR ISLAND

PT. TRACTUS MULTI SERVICES

PLAN AND CROSS SECTION

SHEET NO. DRAWING NO.

PT. SOMA DAYA UTAMA

CONTRUCTION of UNLOADING COAL

KARIMUN BESAR ISLAND

PT. TRACTUS MULTI SERVICES

400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400

PLAN AND CROSS SECTION

SHEET NO. DRAWING NO.

1432 1500 1500 1500 1500 1432

REGENCY, RIAU ISLAND PROVINCE

PT. TRACTUS MULTI SERVICES

934 934 934 934 CATWALK

934 934 934 934 SCALE

3734 SHEET NO. DRAWING NO.